Operations Parts and controls Triple-dial-control Custom Key assignment AF/MF button/AEL button General E-mount Instructions Manual
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Operations
Parts and controls
Triple-dial-control
Custom Key assignment
AFMF buttonAEL button
General
E-mount
Instructions Manual
ENG
2
Table of contents
This instruction manual - Operations - describes the basic operation of the camera and some advanced operations using the major functions See Getting Started for information on how to set up the camera and the Handbook on the CD-ROM (supplied) for more detailed functions and operations
Parts and controlsRecording 3Playback 5Setup 6
Triple-dial-controlTriple-dial-control operation 7Control Dials 9Settings modes 10
Custom key assignmentAssigning functions to the custom keys 18Functions that can be assigned 19
AFMF buttonAEL buttonSwitching the focusing mode with the AFMF button 21Locking the AE with the AEL button 22
GeneralMenu list 23Unique digital shooting functions 32Handbook 34Function restrictions 35Number of recordable images 37Screen icons 40Troubleshooting 43Specifications 43Index 46
ENG
3
Recording
Navigation buttonSelects the adjustment settings for Triple-dial-control operation
Control Dial RSets the items that appear at the top right of the screen
Control Dial LSets the items that appear at the top left of the screen
Shutter buttonShoots still imagesAllows you to focus on the subject when it is pressed half way down
Zoom ringZooms in or out the subject (when a zoom lens is used)
ONOFF (Power) switchTurns camera on and off
Parts and controls All the major camera parts controls and buttons that are used for recording playback and setups are described here
Parts and Controls
ENG
4
Be careful when releasing the pop-up flash and avoid pinching your fingers when retracting it again Keep the flash retracted when not in use
(Flash pop-up) buttonReleases and activates the built-in pop-up flashPress the button when you want to use the flashPush the flash unit down to retract it when not in use (page 36)
MOVIE buttonRecords moviesPress to start recording and press again to stop recording (page 33)
AFMF buttonAEL buttonAt AFMF the focusing mode switches between auto and manual while the button is held down (page 4)At AEL AE is locked while the button is held down (page 22)
DISP buttonSwitches the screen display
Control WheelSets the items that appear to the right of the screen Turn the Control Wheel
buttonCompensates for the lighting situation
buttonSelects the drive mode
ENG
5
(Delete) buttonDeletes the image when the is displayed in the lower rightcorner of the screen
(Enlarge Image) buttonEnlarges the image on the screen when pressed while is displayed at the center on the right side of the screenTurning the Control Wheel adjusts the amount
DISP buttonSwitches the screen display
Control WheelSelects the image
Playback
(Playback) buttonSwitches between the shooting mode and the playback mode
buttonDisplays the image index
Parts and Controls
ENG
6
Setup
Navigation buttonSelects the adjustment settings for Triple-dial-control operation
Control Dial LSets the items that appear at the top left of the screen
Control Dial RSets the items that appear at the top right of the screen
Control WheelSets the items that appear to the right of the screen Rotate to set
Soft key AActivates the func-tion displayed at the upper right corner of the screen
Soft key CActivates the func-tion displayed at the center on the right side of the screen
Soft Key BActivates the function displayed in the lower right corner of the screen
ENG
7
Triple-dial-control operation
The Triple-dial-control provides an alternative to adjustments or settings changes Even though you can set these functions separately elsewhere on the menu the Triple-dial-control allows simultaneous interactive adjustments and settings on a single screen
Navigation button
Items set by turning the Control Wheel
Items set by turning the Control Dial L
Items set by turning the Control Dial R
Triple-dial-control The Triple-dial-control allows you to adjust various shooting settings quickly and intuitively using the three dials and the Navigation button
Triple-dial-control
ENG
8
Press the center of the Control Wheel and turn it to select a shooting mode from P A S or M
Press the Navigation button to select the desired settings
1
2
When Soft Key C Setting is set to Custom select a shooting mode by MENU Shoot Mode
Make each setting by turning the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
3
1
Navigation buttonEach time you press the button the item toggles as follows
You can select the settings you want to use by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings In addition to the settings shown on the left you can also select settings from Picture Effect Set-tings and Custom Settings (page 9)The Exposure Settings item is perma-nent and cannot be altered
Exposure Settings Focus Settings White Balance Settings D-Range Settings Creative Style Settings
Preventing the dials from operating incorrectly
You can lock the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
Hold the Navigation button downTo unlock them hold the Navigation button down againYou can choose to lock the Control Wheel only or not lock any of them by selecting MENU Setup DialWheel Lock
ENG
9
Control Dials functionsThe Control Dials and the Control Wheel have different tasks depending on the settings currently in effect
Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Exposure Settings Shutter speedApertureProgram shift
ApertureExposure compensation
ISO
Focus Settings (AFmode)
Focus area Flexible spotposition (rightleft)
Flexible spotposition (updown)
Focus Settings (MF mode)
Enlarging position(updown)
Enlarging position(rightleft)
Enlarging position(updown)
White BalanceSettings
ModeColortemperature
Color temperature(B-A)
Color temperature(G-M)
D-Range Settings DRO levelHDR level Exposure compensation Mode
Creative StyleSettings
Mode Option Option
Picture EffectSettings
Mode Option ndash
Custom Settings Custom Settings 1 mode Custom Settings 2 mode Custom Settings 3 mode
Exposure Settings is permanent and cannot be alteredPicture Effect Settings and Custom Settings cannot be selected in the default setting You can change the various settings by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings
bullbull
Triple-dial-control
ENG
10
Settings modes
This table describes the settings that can be changed for each mode choiceindicates the default setting
Focus Settings (AF mode)
Exposure Settings
Shooting mode Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Manual exposure Shutter speed Aperture ISO
Shutter Priority Shutter speed Exposure compensation ISO
Aperture Priority Aperture Exposure compensation ISO
Program Auto Program shift Exposure compensation ISO
Sets Autofocus Area
In Flexible Spot move the selection area to the right or left
In Flexible Spot rotate the dial to to move the selection area up or down Finely adjust the position by pressing topbottomrightleft
You can set an exposure compensation by turning the Control Dial R when Anti Motion Blur or Sweep Panorama is selected
bull
ENG
11
Focus Settings (MF mode)
You can set an enlarged focus selection area for manual focusing
You can adjust the scaling with Soft Key B or C
Moves the area up or down
Sets the mode
Moves the area up or downPress the topbottomrightleft to finely adjust the position
Moves the area right or left
Adjusts the color between G (green) and M (magenta)
Adjusts the color between B (blue) and A (amber)
Control Dial L
(Multi) (Multi) The camera uses the twenty-five AF areas and focuses automaticallybullWhen the Face Detection function is active AF prioritizes faces
(Center) (Center) The camera uses the AF area located in the center area exclusively
(Flexible Spot) Moves the focusing area to focus on a small subject or narrow area Press Soft Key B to bring the focusing area back to the center
White Balance Settings
Triple-dial-control
ENG
12
Control Dial L
AWB (Auto WB) The camera automatically detects a light source and adjusts the color temperature
(Daylight) If you select an option to suit a specific light source the color temperature is adjusted for the light source (preset white balance)
(Shade)
(Cloudy)
(Incandescent)
(Fluor WarmWhite)
(Fluor Cool White)
(Fluor Day White)
(Fluor Daylight)
(Flash)
(CTempFilter)
Adjusts the color temperature according to the light source Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography To select a color temperature press Soft Key B followed by turning the Control Dial L
(Custom) Allows you to use the white balance setting retained by Custom Setup
Setting the custom white balanceSelecting Custom with the Control Dial L and pressing Soft Key B will display the Custom Setup screen Hold the camera so that the white area fully covers the AF area located in the center and then press the shutter button down The calibrated values are stored for later use
ENG
13
D-Range Settings
Sets the optimum level
Sets the exposure compensation value (ndash50 EV to +50 EV)
Sets the mode
Control Wheel
(Off) Does not use DROAuto HDR
(D-Range Opt)
By dividing the image into small areas the camera analyzes the contrast of light and shade between the subject and the background producing an image with optimal brightness and gradation
(Auto HDR)Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create an image with richer gradation One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded
Control Dial L
AUTO Lv1 ndash Lv5(D-Range Opt)
The D-Range Optimizer optimizes the gradations of a recorded image in each area of the image Select the optimal level between Lv1 (weak) and Lv5 (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO setting
AUTO 10 EV ndash 60EV (Auto HDR)
Using the Auto HDR sets the exposure difference based on the contrast of the subject Select the optimal level between 10 EV (weak) and 60 EV (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO
This figure shows the histogram before the D-Range Opti-mizer or the Auto HDR is applied not that of the image that will actually be shot
Triple-dial-control
ENG
14
Control Dial L
(Standard) For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and strong colors
(Vivid) Saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers spring greenery blue sky ocean views etc
(Neutral) Saturation and sharpness are lowered for capturing images in a quiet tone This setting is also suitable for capturing images to be modified with a computer
Creative Style Settings
Sets the mode
Selects the contrast saturation or sharpness
Adjusts the contrast saturation or sharpness
Using the D-Range Settings effectivelyBy combining the DROAuto HDR manual setting (exposure difference DRO-Level) and exposure com-pensation you can control the range of the contrast of light and shade (gradations) to be reproducedWith DRO set a DRO-Level to reproduce the shadow tones and set a minus value of exposure com-pensation to reproduce the light tones A large minus compensation and DRO-Level setting may cause noise It is recommended that you check the result first by enlarging the playback image etcWith Auto HDR set the exposure difference to adjust the overall reproduction range and shift the range towards lighter tones (minus compensation) or darker tones (plus compensation) with the expo-sure compensation setting
ENG
15
(Clear) For capturing images in a clear tone to display soft colors in the lighter areas Suitable for capturing radiant light
(Deep) For capturing images with deep and intense color Suitable for capturing the solid feel of the subject
(Light) For capturing images with bright and simple range of color Suitable for capturing a light ambience and feel
(Portrait) For shooting skin tones in a soft manner Ideally suited for shooting portraits
(Landscape) Saturation contrast and sharpness are increased to produce vivid and crisp scenery Distant landscapes also stand out more
(Sunset) For capturing the intense red of sunsets
(NightScene)
Contrast is reduced to capture a nightscape that is more faithful to the actual scene
(Autumnleaves)
For capturing autumn scenes vividly highlighting the red and yellow of colored leaves
(Black ampWhite)
For shooting images in black and white monochrome
(Sepia) For capturing images in sepia monochrome
Control Wheel
(Contrast) The greater the value selected the greater the difference will be between the lighter and darker areas of the image resulting in increased impact
(Saturation) The greater the value selected the more vivid the colors will be When a lower value is selected the colors in the image become weaker and toned down
(Sharpness) The greater the value selected the more the sharpness will be emphasized The lower the value selected the softer the image will be
Triple-dial-control
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
2
Table of contents
This instruction manual - Operations - describes the basic operation of the camera and some advanced operations using the major functions See Getting Started for information on how to set up the camera and the Handbook on the CD-ROM (supplied) for more detailed functions and operations
Parts and controlsRecording 3Playback 5Setup 6
Triple-dial-controlTriple-dial-control operation 7Control Dials 9Settings modes 10
Custom key assignmentAssigning functions to the custom keys 18Functions that can be assigned 19
AFMF buttonAEL buttonSwitching the focusing mode with the AFMF button 21Locking the AE with the AEL button 22
GeneralMenu list 23Unique digital shooting functions 32Handbook 34Function restrictions 35Number of recordable images 37Screen icons 40Troubleshooting 43Specifications 43Index 46
ENG
3
Recording
Navigation buttonSelects the adjustment settings for Triple-dial-control operation
Control Dial RSets the items that appear at the top right of the screen
Control Dial LSets the items that appear at the top left of the screen
Shutter buttonShoots still imagesAllows you to focus on the subject when it is pressed half way down
Zoom ringZooms in or out the subject (when a zoom lens is used)
ONOFF (Power) switchTurns camera on and off
Parts and controls All the major camera parts controls and buttons that are used for recording playback and setups are described here
Parts and Controls
ENG
4
Be careful when releasing the pop-up flash and avoid pinching your fingers when retracting it again Keep the flash retracted when not in use
(Flash pop-up) buttonReleases and activates the built-in pop-up flashPress the button when you want to use the flashPush the flash unit down to retract it when not in use (page 36)
MOVIE buttonRecords moviesPress to start recording and press again to stop recording (page 33)
AFMF buttonAEL buttonAt AFMF the focusing mode switches between auto and manual while the button is held down (page 4)At AEL AE is locked while the button is held down (page 22)
DISP buttonSwitches the screen display
Control WheelSets the items that appear to the right of the screen Turn the Control Wheel
buttonCompensates for the lighting situation
buttonSelects the drive mode
ENG
5
(Delete) buttonDeletes the image when the is displayed in the lower rightcorner of the screen
(Enlarge Image) buttonEnlarges the image on the screen when pressed while is displayed at the center on the right side of the screenTurning the Control Wheel adjusts the amount
DISP buttonSwitches the screen display
Control WheelSelects the image
Playback
(Playback) buttonSwitches between the shooting mode and the playback mode
buttonDisplays the image index
Parts and Controls
ENG
6
Setup
Navigation buttonSelects the adjustment settings for Triple-dial-control operation
Control Dial LSets the items that appear at the top left of the screen
Control Dial RSets the items that appear at the top right of the screen
Control WheelSets the items that appear to the right of the screen Rotate to set
Soft key AActivates the func-tion displayed at the upper right corner of the screen
Soft key CActivates the func-tion displayed at the center on the right side of the screen
Soft Key BActivates the function displayed in the lower right corner of the screen
ENG
7
Triple-dial-control operation
The Triple-dial-control provides an alternative to adjustments or settings changes Even though you can set these functions separately elsewhere on the menu the Triple-dial-control allows simultaneous interactive adjustments and settings on a single screen
Navigation button
Items set by turning the Control Wheel
Items set by turning the Control Dial L
Items set by turning the Control Dial R
Triple-dial-control The Triple-dial-control allows you to adjust various shooting settings quickly and intuitively using the three dials and the Navigation button
Triple-dial-control
ENG
8
Press the center of the Control Wheel and turn it to select a shooting mode from P A S or M
Press the Navigation button to select the desired settings
1
2
When Soft Key C Setting is set to Custom select a shooting mode by MENU Shoot Mode
Make each setting by turning the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
3
1
Navigation buttonEach time you press the button the item toggles as follows
You can select the settings you want to use by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings In addition to the settings shown on the left you can also select settings from Picture Effect Set-tings and Custom Settings (page 9)The Exposure Settings item is perma-nent and cannot be altered
Exposure Settings Focus Settings White Balance Settings D-Range Settings Creative Style Settings
Preventing the dials from operating incorrectly
You can lock the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
Hold the Navigation button downTo unlock them hold the Navigation button down againYou can choose to lock the Control Wheel only or not lock any of them by selecting MENU Setup DialWheel Lock
ENG
9
Control Dials functionsThe Control Dials and the Control Wheel have different tasks depending on the settings currently in effect
Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Exposure Settings Shutter speedApertureProgram shift
ApertureExposure compensation
ISO
Focus Settings (AFmode)
Focus area Flexible spotposition (rightleft)
Flexible spotposition (updown)
Focus Settings (MF mode)
Enlarging position(updown)
Enlarging position(rightleft)
Enlarging position(updown)
White BalanceSettings
ModeColortemperature
Color temperature(B-A)
Color temperature(G-M)
D-Range Settings DRO levelHDR level Exposure compensation Mode
Creative StyleSettings
Mode Option Option
Picture EffectSettings
Mode Option ndash
Custom Settings Custom Settings 1 mode Custom Settings 2 mode Custom Settings 3 mode
Exposure Settings is permanent and cannot be alteredPicture Effect Settings and Custom Settings cannot be selected in the default setting You can change the various settings by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings
bullbull
Triple-dial-control
ENG
10
Settings modes
This table describes the settings that can be changed for each mode choiceindicates the default setting
Focus Settings (AF mode)
Exposure Settings
Shooting mode Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Manual exposure Shutter speed Aperture ISO
Shutter Priority Shutter speed Exposure compensation ISO
Aperture Priority Aperture Exposure compensation ISO
Program Auto Program shift Exposure compensation ISO
Sets Autofocus Area
In Flexible Spot move the selection area to the right or left
In Flexible Spot rotate the dial to to move the selection area up or down Finely adjust the position by pressing topbottomrightleft
You can set an exposure compensation by turning the Control Dial R when Anti Motion Blur or Sweep Panorama is selected
bull
ENG
11
Focus Settings (MF mode)
You can set an enlarged focus selection area for manual focusing
You can adjust the scaling with Soft Key B or C
Moves the area up or down
Sets the mode
Moves the area up or downPress the topbottomrightleft to finely adjust the position
Moves the area right or left
Adjusts the color between G (green) and M (magenta)
Adjusts the color between B (blue) and A (amber)
Control Dial L
(Multi) (Multi) The camera uses the twenty-five AF areas and focuses automaticallybullWhen the Face Detection function is active AF prioritizes faces
(Center) (Center) The camera uses the AF area located in the center area exclusively
(Flexible Spot) Moves the focusing area to focus on a small subject or narrow area Press Soft Key B to bring the focusing area back to the center
White Balance Settings
Triple-dial-control
ENG
12
Control Dial L
AWB (Auto WB) The camera automatically detects a light source and adjusts the color temperature
(Daylight) If you select an option to suit a specific light source the color temperature is adjusted for the light source (preset white balance)
(Shade)
(Cloudy)
(Incandescent)
(Fluor WarmWhite)
(Fluor Cool White)
(Fluor Day White)
(Fluor Daylight)
(Flash)
(CTempFilter)
Adjusts the color temperature according to the light source Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography To select a color temperature press Soft Key B followed by turning the Control Dial L
(Custom) Allows you to use the white balance setting retained by Custom Setup
Setting the custom white balanceSelecting Custom with the Control Dial L and pressing Soft Key B will display the Custom Setup screen Hold the camera so that the white area fully covers the AF area located in the center and then press the shutter button down The calibrated values are stored for later use
ENG
13
D-Range Settings
Sets the optimum level
Sets the exposure compensation value (ndash50 EV to +50 EV)
Sets the mode
Control Wheel
(Off) Does not use DROAuto HDR
(D-Range Opt)
By dividing the image into small areas the camera analyzes the contrast of light and shade between the subject and the background producing an image with optimal brightness and gradation
(Auto HDR)Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create an image with richer gradation One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded
Control Dial L
AUTO Lv1 ndash Lv5(D-Range Opt)
The D-Range Optimizer optimizes the gradations of a recorded image in each area of the image Select the optimal level between Lv1 (weak) and Lv5 (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO setting
AUTO 10 EV ndash 60EV (Auto HDR)
Using the Auto HDR sets the exposure difference based on the contrast of the subject Select the optimal level between 10 EV (weak) and 60 EV (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO
This figure shows the histogram before the D-Range Opti-mizer or the Auto HDR is applied not that of the image that will actually be shot
Triple-dial-control
ENG
14
Control Dial L
(Standard) For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and strong colors
(Vivid) Saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers spring greenery blue sky ocean views etc
(Neutral) Saturation and sharpness are lowered for capturing images in a quiet tone This setting is also suitable for capturing images to be modified with a computer
Creative Style Settings
Sets the mode
Selects the contrast saturation or sharpness
Adjusts the contrast saturation or sharpness
Using the D-Range Settings effectivelyBy combining the DROAuto HDR manual setting (exposure difference DRO-Level) and exposure com-pensation you can control the range of the contrast of light and shade (gradations) to be reproducedWith DRO set a DRO-Level to reproduce the shadow tones and set a minus value of exposure com-pensation to reproduce the light tones A large minus compensation and DRO-Level setting may cause noise It is recommended that you check the result first by enlarging the playback image etcWith Auto HDR set the exposure difference to adjust the overall reproduction range and shift the range towards lighter tones (minus compensation) or darker tones (plus compensation) with the expo-sure compensation setting
ENG
15
(Clear) For capturing images in a clear tone to display soft colors in the lighter areas Suitable for capturing radiant light
(Deep) For capturing images with deep and intense color Suitable for capturing the solid feel of the subject
(Light) For capturing images with bright and simple range of color Suitable for capturing a light ambience and feel
(Portrait) For shooting skin tones in a soft manner Ideally suited for shooting portraits
(Landscape) Saturation contrast and sharpness are increased to produce vivid and crisp scenery Distant landscapes also stand out more
(Sunset) For capturing the intense red of sunsets
(NightScene)
Contrast is reduced to capture a nightscape that is more faithful to the actual scene
(Autumnleaves)
For capturing autumn scenes vividly highlighting the red and yellow of colored leaves
(Black ampWhite)
For shooting images in black and white monochrome
(Sepia) For capturing images in sepia monochrome
Control Wheel
(Contrast) The greater the value selected the greater the difference will be between the lighter and darker areas of the image resulting in increased impact
(Saturation) The greater the value selected the more vivid the colors will be When a lower value is selected the colors in the image become weaker and toned down
(Sharpness) The greater the value selected the more the sharpness will be emphasized The lower the value selected the softer the image will be
Triple-dial-control
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
3
Recording
Navigation buttonSelects the adjustment settings for Triple-dial-control operation
Control Dial RSets the items that appear at the top right of the screen
Control Dial LSets the items that appear at the top left of the screen
Shutter buttonShoots still imagesAllows you to focus on the subject when it is pressed half way down
Zoom ringZooms in or out the subject (when a zoom lens is used)
ONOFF (Power) switchTurns camera on and off
Parts and controls All the major camera parts controls and buttons that are used for recording playback and setups are described here
Parts and Controls
ENG
4
Be careful when releasing the pop-up flash and avoid pinching your fingers when retracting it again Keep the flash retracted when not in use
(Flash pop-up) buttonReleases and activates the built-in pop-up flashPress the button when you want to use the flashPush the flash unit down to retract it when not in use (page 36)
MOVIE buttonRecords moviesPress to start recording and press again to stop recording (page 33)
AFMF buttonAEL buttonAt AFMF the focusing mode switches between auto and manual while the button is held down (page 4)At AEL AE is locked while the button is held down (page 22)
DISP buttonSwitches the screen display
Control WheelSets the items that appear to the right of the screen Turn the Control Wheel
buttonCompensates for the lighting situation
buttonSelects the drive mode
ENG
5
(Delete) buttonDeletes the image when the is displayed in the lower rightcorner of the screen
(Enlarge Image) buttonEnlarges the image on the screen when pressed while is displayed at the center on the right side of the screenTurning the Control Wheel adjusts the amount
DISP buttonSwitches the screen display
Control WheelSelects the image
Playback
(Playback) buttonSwitches between the shooting mode and the playback mode
buttonDisplays the image index
Parts and Controls
ENG
6
Setup
Navigation buttonSelects the adjustment settings for Triple-dial-control operation
Control Dial LSets the items that appear at the top left of the screen
Control Dial RSets the items that appear at the top right of the screen
Control WheelSets the items that appear to the right of the screen Rotate to set
Soft key AActivates the func-tion displayed at the upper right corner of the screen
Soft key CActivates the func-tion displayed at the center on the right side of the screen
Soft Key BActivates the function displayed in the lower right corner of the screen
ENG
7
Triple-dial-control operation
The Triple-dial-control provides an alternative to adjustments or settings changes Even though you can set these functions separately elsewhere on the menu the Triple-dial-control allows simultaneous interactive adjustments and settings on a single screen
Navigation button
Items set by turning the Control Wheel
Items set by turning the Control Dial L
Items set by turning the Control Dial R
Triple-dial-control The Triple-dial-control allows you to adjust various shooting settings quickly and intuitively using the three dials and the Navigation button
Triple-dial-control
ENG
8
Press the center of the Control Wheel and turn it to select a shooting mode from P A S or M
Press the Navigation button to select the desired settings
1
2
When Soft Key C Setting is set to Custom select a shooting mode by MENU Shoot Mode
Make each setting by turning the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
3
1
Navigation buttonEach time you press the button the item toggles as follows
You can select the settings you want to use by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings In addition to the settings shown on the left you can also select settings from Picture Effect Set-tings and Custom Settings (page 9)The Exposure Settings item is perma-nent and cannot be altered
Exposure Settings Focus Settings White Balance Settings D-Range Settings Creative Style Settings
Preventing the dials from operating incorrectly
You can lock the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
Hold the Navigation button downTo unlock them hold the Navigation button down againYou can choose to lock the Control Wheel only or not lock any of them by selecting MENU Setup DialWheel Lock
ENG
9
Control Dials functionsThe Control Dials and the Control Wheel have different tasks depending on the settings currently in effect
Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Exposure Settings Shutter speedApertureProgram shift
ApertureExposure compensation
ISO
Focus Settings (AFmode)
Focus area Flexible spotposition (rightleft)
Flexible spotposition (updown)
Focus Settings (MF mode)
Enlarging position(updown)
Enlarging position(rightleft)
Enlarging position(updown)
White BalanceSettings
ModeColortemperature
Color temperature(B-A)
Color temperature(G-M)
D-Range Settings DRO levelHDR level Exposure compensation Mode
Creative StyleSettings
Mode Option Option
Picture EffectSettings
Mode Option ndash
Custom Settings Custom Settings 1 mode Custom Settings 2 mode Custom Settings 3 mode
Exposure Settings is permanent and cannot be alteredPicture Effect Settings and Custom Settings cannot be selected in the default setting You can change the various settings by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings
bullbull
Triple-dial-control
ENG
10
Settings modes
This table describes the settings that can be changed for each mode choiceindicates the default setting
Focus Settings (AF mode)
Exposure Settings
Shooting mode Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Manual exposure Shutter speed Aperture ISO
Shutter Priority Shutter speed Exposure compensation ISO
Aperture Priority Aperture Exposure compensation ISO
Program Auto Program shift Exposure compensation ISO
Sets Autofocus Area
In Flexible Spot move the selection area to the right or left
In Flexible Spot rotate the dial to to move the selection area up or down Finely adjust the position by pressing topbottomrightleft
You can set an exposure compensation by turning the Control Dial R when Anti Motion Blur or Sweep Panorama is selected
bull
ENG
11
Focus Settings (MF mode)
You can set an enlarged focus selection area for manual focusing
You can adjust the scaling with Soft Key B or C
Moves the area up or down
Sets the mode
Moves the area up or downPress the topbottomrightleft to finely adjust the position
Moves the area right or left
Adjusts the color between G (green) and M (magenta)
Adjusts the color between B (blue) and A (amber)
Control Dial L
(Multi) (Multi) The camera uses the twenty-five AF areas and focuses automaticallybullWhen the Face Detection function is active AF prioritizes faces
(Center) (Center) The camera uses the AF area located in the center area exclusively
(Flexible Spot) Moves the focusing area to focus on a small subject or narrow area Press Soft Key B to bring the focusing area back to the center
White Balance Settings
Triple-dial-control
ENG
12
Control Dial L
AWB (Auto WB) The camera automatically detects a light source and adjusts the color temperature
(Daylight) If you select an option to suit a specific light source the color temperature is adjusted for the light source (preset white balance)
(Shade)
(Cloudy)
(Incandescent)
(Fluor WarmWhite)
(Fluor Cool White)
(Fluor Day White)
(Fluor Daylight)
(Flash)
(CTempFilter)
Adjusts the color temperature according to the light source Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography To select a color temperature press Soft Key B followed by turning the Control Dial L
(Custom) Allows you to use the white balance setting retained by Custom Setup
Setting the custom white balanceSelecting Custom with the Control Dial L and pressing Soft Key B will display the Custom Setup screen Hold the camera so that the white area fully covers the AF area located in the center and then press the shutter button down The calibrated values are stored for later use
ENG
13
D-Range Settings
Sets the optimum level
Sets the exposure compensation value (ndash50 EV to +50 EV)
Sets the mode
Control Wheel
(Off) Does not use DROAuto HDR
(D-Range Opt)
By dividing the image into small areas the camera analyzes the contrast of light and shade between the subject and the background producing an image with optimal brightness and gradation
(Auto HDR)Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create an image with richer gradation One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded
Control Dial L
AUTO Lv1 ndash Lv5(D-Range Opt)
The D-Range Optimizer optimizes the gradations of a recorded image in each area of the image Select the optimal level between Lv1 (weak) and Lv5 (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO setting
AUTO 10 EV ndash 60EV (Auto HDR)
Using the Auto HDR sets the exposure difference based on the contrast of the subject Select the optimal level between 10 EV (weak) and 60 EV (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO
This figure shows the histogram before the D-Range Opti-mizer or the Auto HDR is applied not that of the image that will actually be shot
Triple-dial-control
ENG
14
Control Dial L
(Standard) For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and strong colors
(Vivid) Saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers spring greenery blue sky ocean views etc
(Neutral) Saturation and sharpness are lowered for capturing images in a quiet tone This setting is also suitable for capturing images to be modified with a computer
Creative Style Settings
Sets the mode
Selects the contrast saturation or sharpness
Adjusts the contrast saturation or sharpness
Using the D-Range Settings effectivelyBy combining the DROAuto HDR manual setting (exposure difference DRO-Level) and exposure com-pensation you can control the range of the contrast of light and shade (gradations) to be reproducedWith DRO set a DRO-Level to reproduce the shadow tones and set a minus value of exposure com-pensation to reproduce the light tones A large minus compensation and DRO-Level setting may cause noise It is recommended that you check the result first by enlarging the playback image etcWith Auto HDR set the exposure difference to adjust the overall reproduction range and shift the range towards lighter tones (minus compensation) or darker tones (plus compensation) with the expo-sure compensation setting
ENG
15
(Clear) For capturing images in a clear tone to display soft colors in the lighter areas Suitable for capturing radiant light
(Deep) For capturing images with deep and intense color Suitable for capturing the solid feel of the subject
(Light) For capturing images with bright and simple range of color Suitable for capturing a light ambience and feel
(Portrait) For shooting skin tones in a soft manner Ideally suited for shooting portraits
(Landscape) Saturation contrast and sharpness are increased to produce vivid and crisp scenery Distant landscapes also stand out more
(Sunset) For capturing the intense red of sunsets
(NightScene)
Contrast is reduced to capture a nightscape that is more faithful to the actual scene
(Autumnleaves)
For capturing autumn scenes vividly highlighting the red and yellow of colored leaves
(Black ampWhite)
For shooting images in black and white monochrome
(Sepia) For capturing images in sepia monochrome
Control Wheel
(Contrast) The greater the value selected the greater the difference will be between the lighter and darker areas of the image resulting in increased impact
(Saturation) The greater the value selected the more vivid the colors will be When a lower value is selected the colors in the image become weaker and toned down
(Sharpness) The greater the value selected the more the sharpness will be emphasized The lower the value selected the softer the image will be
Triple-dial-control
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
4
Be careful when releasing the pop-up flash and avoid pinching your fingers when retracting it again Keep the flash retracted when not in use
(Flash pop-up) buttonReleases and activates the built-in pop-up flashPress the button when you want to use the flashPush the flash unit down to retract it when not in use (page 36)
MOVIE buttonRecords moviesPress to start recording and press again to stop recording (page 33)
AFMF buttonAEL buttonAt AFMF the focusing mode switches between auto and manual while the button is held down (page 4)At AEL AE is locked while the button is held down (page 22)
DISP buttonSwitches the screen display
Control WheelSets the items that appear to the right of the screen Turn the Control Wheel
buttonCompensates for the lighting situation
buttonSelects the drive mode
ENG
5
(Delete) buttonDeletes the image when the is displayed in the lower rightcorner of the screen
(Enlarge Image) buttonEnlarges the image on the screen when pressed while is displayed at the center on the right side of the screenTurning the Control Wheel adjusts the amount
DISP buttonSwitches the screen display
Control WheelSelects the image
Playback
(Playback) buttonSwitches between the shooting mode and the playback mode
buttonDisplays the image index
Parts and Controls
ENG
6
Setup
Navigation buttonSelects the adjustment settings for Triple-dial-control operation
Control Dial LSets the items that appear at the top left of the screen
Control Dial RSets the items that appear at the top right of the screen
Control WheelSets the items that appear to the right of the screen Rotate to set
Soft key AActivates the func-tion displayed at the upper right corner of the screen
Soft key CActivates the func-tion displayed at the center on the right side of the screen
Soft Key BActivates the function displayed in the lower right corner of the screen
ENG
7
Triple-dial-control operation
The Triple-dial-control provides an alternative to adjustments or settings changes Even though you can set these functions separately elsewhere on the menu the Triple-dial-control allows simultaneous interactive adjustments and settings on a single screen
Navigation button
Items set by turning the Control Wheel
Items set by turning the Control Dial L
Items set by turning the Control Dial R
Triple-dial-control The Triple-dial-control allows you to adjust various shooting settings quickly and intuitively using the three dials and the Navigation button
Triple-dial-control
ENG
8
Press the center of the Control Wheel and turn it to select a shooting mode from P A S or M
Press the Navigation button to select the desired settings
1
2
When Soft Key C Setting is set to Custom select a shooting mode by MENU Shoot Mode
Make each setting by turning the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
3
1
Navigation buttonEach time you press the button the item toggles as follows
You can select the settings you want to use by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings In addition to the settings shown on the left you can also select settings from Picture Effect Set-tings and Custom Settings (page 9)The Exposure Settings item is perma-nent and cannot be altered
Exposure Settings Focus Settings White Balance Settings D-Range Settings Creative Style Settings
Preventing the dials from operating incorrectly
You can lock the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
Hold the Navigation button downTo unlock them hold the Navigation button down againYou can choose to lock the Control Wheel only or not lock any of them by selecting MENU Setup DialWheel Lock
ENG
9
Control Dials functionsThe Control Dials and the Control Wheel have different tasks depending on the settings currently in effect
Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Exposure Settings Shutter speedApertureProgram shift
ApertureExposure compensation
ISO
Focus Settings (AFmode)
Focus area Flexible spotposition (rightleft)
Flexible spotposition (updown)
Focus Settings (MF mode)
Enlarging position(updown)
Enlarging position(rightleft)
Enlarging position(updown)
White BalanceSettings
ModeColortemperature
Color temperature(B-A)
Color temperature(G-M)
D-Range Settings DRO levelHDR level Exposure compensation Mode
Creative StyleSettings
Mode Option Option
Picture EffectSettings
Mode Option ndash
Custom Settings Custom Settings 1 mode Custom Settings 2 mode Custom Settings 3 mode
Exposure Settings is permanent and cannot be alteredPicture Effect Settings and Custom Settings cannot be selected in the default setting You can change the various settings by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings
bullbull
Triple-dial-control
ENG
10
Settings modes
This table describes the settings that can be changed for each mode choiceindicates the default setting
Focus Settings (AF mode)
Exposure Settings
Shooting mode Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Manual exposure Shutter speed Aperture ISO
Shutter Priority Shutter speed Exposure compensation ISO
Aperture Priority Aperture Exposure compensation ISO
Program Auto Program shift Exposure compensation ISO
Sets Autofocus Area
In Flexible Spot move the selection area to the right or left
In Flexible Spot rotate the dial to to move the selection area up or down Finely adjust the position by pressing topbottomrightleft
You can set an exposure compensation by turning the Control Dial R when Anti Motion Blur or Sweep Panorama is selected
bull
ENG
11
Focus Settings (MF mode)
You can set an enlarged focus selection area for manual focusing
You can adjust the scaling with Soft Key B or C
Moves the area up or down
Sets the mode
Moves the area up or downPress the topbottomrightleft to finely adjust the position
Moves the area right or left
Adjusts the color between G (green) and M (magenta)
Adjusts the color between B (blue) and A (amber)
Control Dial L
(Multi) (Multi) The camera uses the twenty-five AF areas and focuses automaticallybullWhen the Face Detection function is active AF prioritizes faces
(Center) (Center) The camera uses the AF area located in the center area exclusively
(Flexible Spot) Moves the focusing area to focus on a small subject or narrow area Press Soft Key B to bring the focusing area back to the center
White Balance Settings
Triple-dial-control
ENG
12
Control Dial L
AWB (Auto WB) The camera automatically detects a light source and adjusts the color temperature
(Daylight) If you select an option to suit a specific light source the color temperature is adjusted for the light source (preset white balance)
(Shade)
(Cloudy)
(Incandescent)
(Fluor WarmWhite)
(Fluor Cool White)
(Fluor Day White)
(Fluor Daylight)
(Flash)
(CTempFilter)
Adjusts the color temperature according to the light source Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography To select a color temperature press Soft Key B followed by turning the Control Dial L
(Custom) Allows you to use the white balance setting retained by Custom Setup
Setting the custom white balanceSelecting Custom with the Control Dial L and pressing Soft Key B will display the Custom Setup screen Hold the camera so that the white area fully covers the AF area located in the center and then press the shutter button down The calibrated values are stored for later use
ENG
13
D-Range Settings
Sets the optimum level
Sets the exposure compensation value (ndash50 EV to +50 EV)
Sets the mode
Control Wheel
(Off) Does not use DROAuto HDR
(D-Range Opt)
By dividing the image into small areas the camera analyzes the contrast of light and shade between the subject and the background producing an image with optimal brightness and gradation
(Auto HDR)Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create an image with richer gradation One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded
Control Dial L
AUTO Lv1 ndash Lv5(D-Range Opt)
The D-Range Optimizer optimizes the gradations of a recorded image in each area of the image Select the optimal level between Lv1 (weak) and Lv5 (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO setting
AUTO 10 EV ndash 60EV (Auto HDR)
Using the Auto HDR sets the exposure difference based on the contrast of the subject Select the optimal level between 10 EV (weak) and 60 EV (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO
This figure shows the histogram before the D-Range Opti-mizer or the Auto HDR is applied not that of the image that will actually be shot
Triple-dial-control
ENG
14
Control Dial L
(Standard) For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and strong colors
(Vivid) Saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers spring greenery blue sky ocean views etc
(Neutral) Saturation and sharpness are lowered for capturing images in a quiet tone This setting is also suitable for capturing images to be modified with a computer
Creative Style Settings
Sets the mode
Selects the contrast saturation or sharpness
Adjusts the contrast saturation or sharpness
Using the D-Range Settings effectivelyBy combining the DROAuto HDR manual setting (exposure difference DRO-Level) and exposure com-pensation you can control the range of the contrast of light and shade (gradations) to be reproducedWith DRO set a DRO-Level to reproduce the shadow tones and set a minus value of exposure com-pensation to reproduce the light tones A large minus compensation and DRO-Level setting may cause noise It is recommended that you check the result first by enlarging the playback image etcWith Auto HDR set the exposure difference to adjust the overall reproduction range and shift the range towards lighter tones (minus compensation) or darker tones (plus compensation) with the expo-sure compensation setting
ENG
15
(Clear) For capturing images in a clear tone to display soft colors in the lighter areas Suitable for capturing radiant light
(Deep) For capturing images with deep and intense color Suitable for capturing the solid feel of the subject
(Light) For capturing images with bright and simple range of color Suitable for capturing a light ambience and feel
(Portrait) For shooting skin tones in a soft manner Ideally suited for shooting portraits
(Landscape) Saturation contrast and sharpness are increased to produce vivid and crisp scenery Distant landscapes also stand out more
(Sunset) For capturing the intense red of sunsets
(NightScene)
Contrast is reduced to capture a nightscape that is more faithful to the actual scene
(Autumnleaves)
For capturing autumn scenes vividly highlighting the red and yellow of colored leaves
(Black ampWhite)
For shooting images in black and white monochrome
(Sepia) For capturing images in sepia monochrome
Control Wheel
(Contrast) The greater the value selected the greater the difference will be between the lighter and darker areas of the image resulting in increased impact
(Saturation) The greater the value selected the more vivid the colors will be When a lower value is selected the colors in the image become weaker and toned down
(Sharpness) The greater the value selected the more the sharpness will be emphasized The lower the value selected the softer the image will be
Triple-dial-control
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
5
(Delete) buttonDeletes the image when the is displayed in the lower rightcorner of the screen
(Enlarge Image) buttonEnlarges the image on the screen when pressed while is displayed at the center on the right side of the screenTurning the Control Wheel adjusts the amount
DISP buttonSwitches the screen display
Control WheelSelects the image
Playback
(Playback) buttonSwitches between the shooting mode and the playback mode
buttonDisplays the image index
Parts and Controls
ENG
6
Setup
Navigation buttonSelects the adjustment settings for Triple-dial-control operation
Control Dial LSets the items that appear at the top left of the screen
Control Dial RSets the items that appear at the top right of the screen
Control WheelSets the items that appear to the right of the screen Rotate to set
Soft key AActivates the func-tion displayed at the upper right corner of the screen
Soft key CActivates the func-tion displayed at the center on the right side of the screen
Soft Key BActivates the function displayed in the lower right corner of the screen
ENG
7
Triple-dial-control operation
The Triple-dial-control provides an alternative to adjustments or settings changes Even though you can set these functions separately elsewhere on the menu the Triple-dial-control allows simultaneous interactive adjustments and settings on a single screen
Navigation button
Items set by turning the Control Wheel
Items set by turning the Control Dial L
Items set by turning the Control Dial R
Triple-dial-control The Triple-dial-control allows you to adjust various shooting settings quickly and intuitively using the three dials and the Navigation button
Triple-dial-control
ENG
8
Press the center of the Control Wheel and turn it to select a shooting mode from P A S or M
Press the Navigation button to select the desired settings
1
2
When Soft Key C Setting is set to Custom select a shooting mode by MENU Shoot Mode
Make each setting by turning the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
3
1
Navigation buttonEach time you press the button the item toggles as follows
You can select the settings you want to use by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings In addition to the settings shown on the left you can also select settings from Picture Effect Set-tings and Custom Settings (page 9)The Exposure Settings item is perma-nent and cannot be altered
Exposure Settings Focus Settings White Balance Settings D-Range Settings Creative Style Settings
Preventing the dials from operating incorrectly
You can lock the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
Hold the Navigation button downTo unlock them hold the Navigation button down againYou can choose to lock the Control Wheel only or not lock any of them by selecting MENU Setup DialWheel Lock
ENG
9
Control Dials functionsThe Control Dials and the Control Wheel have different tasks depending on the settings currently in effect
Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Exposure Settings Shutter speedApertureProgram shift
ApertureExposure compensation
ISO
Focus Settings (AFmode)
Focus area Flexible spotposition (rightleft)
Flexible spotposition (updown)
Focus Settings (MF mode)
Enlarging position(updown)
Enlarging position(rightleft)
Enlarging position(updown)
White BalanceSettings
ModeColortemperature
Color temperature(B-A)
Color temperature(G-M)
D-Range Settings DRO levelHDR level Exposure compensation Mode
Creative StyleSettings
Mode Option Option
Picture EffectSettings
Mode Option ndash
Custom Settings Custom Settings 1 mode Custom Settings 2 mode Custom Settings 3 mode
Exposure Settings is permanent and cannot be alteredPicture Effect Settings and Custom Settings cannot be selected in the default setting You can change the various settings by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings
bullbull
Triple-dial-control
ENG
10
Settings modes
This table describes the settings that can be changed for each mode choiceindicates the default setting
Focus Settings (AF mode)
Exposure Settings
Shooting mode Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Manual exposure Shutter speed Aperture ISO
Shutter Priority Shutter speed Exposure compensation ISO
Aperture Priority Aperture Exposure compensation ISO
Program Auto Program shift Exposure compensation ISO
Sets Autofocus Area
In Flexible Spot move the selection area to the right or left
In Flexible Spot rotate the dial to to move the selection area up or down Finely adjust the position by pressing topbottomrightleft
You can set an exposure compensation by turning the Control Dial R when Anti Motion Blur or Sweep Panorama is selected
bull
ENG
11
Focus Settings (MF mode)
You can set an enlarged focus selection area for manual focusing
You can adjust the scaling with Soft Key B or C
Moves the area up or down
Sets the mode
Moves the area up or downPress the topbottomrightleft to finely adjust the position
Moves the area right or left
Adjusts the color between G (green) and M (magenta)
Adjusts the color between B (blue) and A (amber)
Control Dial L
(Multi) (Multi) The camera uses the twenty-five AF areas and focuses automaticallybullWhen the Face Detection function is active AF prioritizes faces
(Center) (Center) The camera uses the AF area located in the center area exclusively
(Flexible Spot) Moves the focusing area to focus on a small subject or narrow area Press Soft Key B to bring the focusing area back to the center
White Balance Settings
Triple-dial-control
ENG
12
Control Dial L
AWB (Auto WB) The camera automatically detects a light source and adjusts the color temperature
(Daylight) If you select an option to suit a specific light source the color temperature is adjusted for the light source (preset white balance)
(Shade)
(Cloudy)
(Incandescent)
(Fluor WarmWhite)
(Fluor Cool White)
(Fluor Day White)
(Fluor Daylight)
(Flash)
(CTempFilter)
Adjusts the color temperature according to the light source Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography To select a color temperature press Soft Key B followed by turning the Control Dial L
(Custom) Allows you to use the white balance setting retained by Custom Setup
Setting the custom white balanceSelecting Custom with the Control Dial L and pressing Soft Key B will display the Custom Setup screen Hold the camera so that the white area fully covers the AF area located in the center and then press the shutter button down The calibrated values are stored for later use
ENG
13
D-Range Settings
Sets the optimum level
Sets the exposure compensation value (ndash50 EV to +50 EV)
Sets the mode
Control Wheel
(Off) Does not use DROAuto HDR
(D-Range Opt)
By dividing the image into small areas the camera analyzes the contrast of light and shade between the subject and the background producing an image with optimal brightness and gradation
(Auto HDR)Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create an image with richer gradation One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded
Control Dial L
AUTO Lv1 ndash Lv5(D-Range Opt)
The D-Range Optimizer optimizes the gradations of a recorded image in each area of the image Select the optimal level between Lv1 (weak) and Lv5 (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO setting
AUTO 10 EV ndash 60EV (Auto HDR)
Using the Auto HDR sets the exposure difference based on the contrast of the subject Select the optimal level between 10 EV (weak) and 60 EV (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO
This figure shows the histogram before the D-Range Opti-mizer or the Auto HDR is applied not that of the image that will actually be shot
Triple-dial-control
ENG
14
Control Dial L
(Standard) For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and strong colors
(Vivid) Saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers spring greenery blue sky ocean views etc
(Neutral) Saturation and sharpness are lowered for capturing images in a quiet tone This setting is also suitable for capturing images to be modified with a computer
Creative Style Settings
Sets the mode
Selects the contrast saturation or sharpness
Adjusts the contrast saturation or sharpness
Using the D-Range Settings effectivelyBy combining the DROAuto HDR manual setting (exposure difference DRO-Level) and exposure com-pensation you can control the range of the contrast of light and shade (gradations) to be reproducedWith DRO set a DRO-Level to reproduce the shadow tones and set a minus value of exposure com-pensation to reproduce the light tones A large minus compensation and DRO-Level setting may cause noise It is recommended that you check the result first by enlarging the playback image etcWith Auto HDR set the exposure difference to adjust the overall reproduction range and shift the range towards lighter tones (minus compensation) or darker tones (plus compensation) with the expo-sure compensation setting
ENG
15
(Clear) For capturing images in a clear tone to display soft colors in the lighter areas Suitable for capturing radiant light
(Deep) For capturing images with deep and intense color Suitable for capturing the solid feel of the subject
(Light) For capturing images with bright and simple range of color Suitable for capturing a light ambience and feel
(Portrait) For shooting skin tones in a soft manner Ideally suited for shooting portraits
(Landscape) Saturation contrast and sharpness are increased to produce vivid and crisp scenery Distant landscapes also stand out more
(Sunset) For capturing the intense red of sunsets
(NightScene)
Contrast is reduced to capture a nightscape that is more faithful to the actual scene
(Autumnleaves)
For capturing autumn scenes vividly highlighting the red and yellow of colored leaves
(Black ampWhite)
For shooting images in black and white monochrome
(Sepia) For capturing images in sepia monochrome
Control Wheel
(Contrast) The greater the value selected the greater the difference will be between the lighter and darker areas of the image resulting in increased impact
(Saturation) The greater the value selected the more vivid the colors will be When a lower value is selected the colors in the image become weaker and toned down
(Sharpness) The greater the value selected the more the sharpness will be emphasized The lower the value selected the softer the image will be
Triple-dial-control
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
6
Setup
Navigation buttonSelects the adjustment settings for Triple-dial-control operation
Control Dial LSets the items that appear at the top left of the screen
Control Dial RSets the items that appear at the top right of the screen
Control WheelSets the items that appear to the right of the screen Rotate to set
Soft key AActivates the func-tion displayed at the upper right corner of the screen
Soft key CActivates the func-tion displayed at the center on the right side of the screen
Soft Key BActivates the function displayed in the lower right corner of the screen
ENG
7
Triple-dial-control operation
The Triple-dial-control provides an alternative to adjustments or settings changes Even though you can set these functions separately elsewhere on the menu the Triple-dial-control allows simultaneous interactive adjustments and settings on a single screen
Navigation button
Items set by turning the Control Wheel
Items set by turning the Control Dial L
Items set by turning the Control Dial R
Triple-dial-control The Triple-dial-control allows you to adjust various shooting settings quickly and intuitively using the three dials and the Navigation button
Triple-dial-control
ENG
8
Press the center of the Control Wheel and turn it to select a shooting mode from P A S or M
Press the Navigation button to select the desired settings
1
2
When Soft Key C Setting is set to Custom select a shooting mode by MENU Shoot Mode
Make each setting by turning the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
3
1
Navigation buttonEach time you press the button the item toggles as follows
You can select the settings you want to use by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings In addition to the settings shown on the left you can also select settings from Picture Effect Set-tings and Custom Settings (page 9)The Exposure Settings item is perma-nent and cannot be altered
Exposure Settings Focus Settings White Balance Settings D-Range Settings Creative Style Settings
Preventing the dials from operating incorrectly
You can lock the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
Hold the Navigation button downTo unlock them hold the Navigation button down againYou can choose to lock the Control Wheel only or not lock any of them by selecting MENU Setup DialWheel Lock
ENG
9
Control Dials functionsThe Control Dials and the Control Wheel have different tasks depending on the settings currently in effect
Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Exposure Settings Shutter speedApertureProgram shift
ApertureExposure compensation
ISO
Focus Settings (AFmode)
Focus area Flexible spotposition (rightleft)
Flexible spotposition (updown)
Focus Settings (MF mode)
Enlarging position(updown)
Enlarging position(rightleft)
Enlarging position(updown)
White BalanceSettings
ModeColortemperature
Color temperature(B-A)
Color temperature(G-M)
D-Range Settings DRO levelHDR level Exposure compensation Mode
Creative StyleSettings
Mode Option Option
Picture EffectSettings
Mode Option ndash
Custom Settings Custom Settings 1 mode Custom Settings 2 mode Custom Settings 3 mode
Exposure Settings is permanent and cannot be alteredPicture Effect Settings and Custom Settings cannot be selected in the default setting You can change the various settings by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings
bullbull
Triple-dial-control
ENG
10
Settings modes
This table describes the settings that can be changed for each mode choiceindicates the default setting
Focus Settings (AF mode)
Exposure Settings
Shooting mode Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Manual exposure Shutter speed Aperture ISO
Shutter Priority Shutter speed Exposure compensation ISO
Aperture Priority Aperture Exposure compensation ISO
Program Auto Program shift Exposure compensation ISO
Sets Autofocus Area
In Flexible Spot move the selection area to the right or left
In Flexible Spot rotate the dial to to move the selection area up or down Finely adjust the position by pressing topbottomrightleft
You can set an exposure compensation by turning the Control Dial R when Anti Motion Blur or Sweep Panorama is selected
bull
ENG
11
Focus Settings (MF mode)
You can set an enlarged focus selection area for manual focusing
You can adjust the scaling with Soft Key B or C
Moves the area up or down
Sets the mode
Moves the area up or downPress the topbottomrightleft to finely adjust the position
Moves the area right or left
Adjusts the color between G (green) and M (magenta)
Adjusts the color between B (blue) and A (amber)
Control Dial L
(Multi) (Multi) The camera uses the twenty-five AF areas and focuses automaticallybullWhen the Face Detection function is active AF prioritizes faces
(Center) (Center) The camera uses the AF area located in the center area exclusively
(Flexible Spot) Moves the focusing area to focus on a small subject or narrow area Press Soft Key B to bring the focusing area back to the center
White Balance Settings
Triple-dial-control
ENG
12
Control Dial L
AWB (Auto WB) The camera automatically detects a light source and adjusts the color temperature
(Daylight) If you select an option to suit a specific light source the color temperature is adjusted for the light source (preset white balance)
(Shade)
(Cloudy)
(Incandescent)
(Fluor WarmWhite)
(Fluor Cool White)
(Fluor Day White)
(Fluor Daylight)
(Flash)
(CTempFilter)
Adjusts the color temperature according to the light source Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography To select a color temperature press Soft Key B followed by turning the Control Dial L
(Custom) Allows you to use the white balance setting retained by Custom Setup
Setting the custom white balanceSelecting Custom with the Control Dial L and pressing Soft Key B will display the Custom Setup screen Hold the camera so that the white area fully covers the AF area located in the center and then press the shutter button down The calibrated values are stored for later use
ENG
13
D-Range Settings
Sets the optimum level
Sets the exposure compensation value (ndash50 EV to +50 EV)
Sets the mode
Control Wheel
(Off) Does not use DROAuto HDR
(D-Range Opt)
By dividing the image into small areas the camera analyzes the contrast of light and shade between the subject and the background producing an image with optimal brightness and gradation
(Auto HDR)Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create an image with richer gradation One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded
Control Dial L
AUTO Lv1 ndash Lv5(D-Range Opt)
The D-Range Optimizer optimizes the gradations of a recorded image in each area of the image Select the optimal level between Lv1 (weak) and Lv5 (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO setting
AUTO 10 EV ndash 60EV (Auto HDR)
Using the Auto HDR sets the exposure difference based on the contrast of the subject Select the optimal level between 10 EV (weak) and 60 EV (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO
This figure shows the histogram before the D-Range Opti-mizer or the Auto HDR is applied not that of the image that will actually be shot
Triple-dial-control
ENG
14
Control Dial L
(Standard) For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and strong colors
(Vivid) Saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers spring greenery blue sky ocean views etc
(Neutral) Saturation and sharpness are lowered for capturing images in a quiet tone This setting is also suitable for capturing images to be modified with a computer
Creative Style Settings
Sets the mode
Selects the contrast saturation or sharpness
Adjusts the contrast saturation or sharpness
Using the D-Range Settings effectivelyBy combining the DROAuto HDR manual setting (exposure difference DRO-Level) and exposure com-pensation you can control the range of the contrast of light and shade (gradations) to be reproducedWith DRO set a DRO-Level to reproduce the shadow tones and set a minus value of exposure com-pensation to reproduce the light tones A large minus compensation and DRO-Level setting may cause noise It is recommended that you check the result first by enlarging the playback image etcWith Auto HDR set the exposure difference to adjust the overall reproduction range and shift the range towards lighter tones (minus compensation) or darker tones (plus compensation) with the expo-sure compensation setting
ENG
15
(Clear) For capturing images in a clear tone to display soft colors in the lighter areas Suitable for capturing radiant light
(Deep) For capturing images with deep and intense color Suitable for capturing the solid feel of the subject
(Light) For capturing images with bright and simple range of color Suitable for capturing a light ambience and feel
(Portrait) For shooting skin tones in a soft manner Ideally suited for shooting portraits
(Landscape) Saturation contrast and sharpness are increased to produce vivid and crisp scenery Distant landscapes also stand out more
(Sunset) For capturing the intense red of sunsets
(NightScene)
Contrast is reduced to capture a nightscape that is more faithful to the actual scene
(Autumnleaves)
For capturing autumn scenes vividly highlighting the red and yellow of colored leaves
(Black ampWhite)
For shooting images in black and white monochrome
(Sepia) For capturing images in sepia monochrome
Control Wheel
(Contrast) The greater the value selected the greater the difference will be between the lighter and darker areas of the image resulting in increased impact
(Saturation) The greater the value selected the more vivid the colors will be When a lower value is selected the colors in the image become weaker and toned down
(Sharpness) The greater the value selected the more the sharpness will be emphasized The lower the value selected the softer the image will be
Triple-dial-control
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
7
Triple-dial-control operation
The Triple-dial-control provides an alternative to adjustments or settings changes Even though you can set these functions separately elsewhere on the menu the Triple-dial-control allows simultaneous interactive adjustments and settings on a single screen
Navigation button
Items set by turning the Control Wheel
Items set by turning the Control Dial L
Items set by turning the Control Dial R
Triple-dial-control The Triple-dial-control allows you to adjust various shooting settings quickly and intuitively using the three dials and the Navigation button
Triple-dial-control
ENG
8
Press the center of the Control Wheel and turn it to select a shooting mode from P A S or M
Press the Navigation button to select the desired settings
1
2
When Soft Key C Setting is set to Custom select a shooting mode by MENU Shoot Mode
Make each setting by turning the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
3
1
Navigation buttonEach time you press the button the item toggles as follows
You can select the settings you want to use by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings In addition to the settings shown on the left you can also select settings from Picture Effect Set-tings and Custom Settings (page 9)The Exposure Settings item is perma-nent and cannot be altered
Exposure Settings Focus Settings White Balance Settings D-Range Settings Creative Style Settings
Preventing the dials from operating incorrectly
You can lock the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
Hold the Navigation button downTo unlock them hold the Navigation button down againYou can choose to lock the Control Wheel only or not lock any of them by selecting MENU Setup DialWheel Lock
ENG
9
Control Dials functionsThe Control Dials and the Control Wheel have different tasks depending on the settings currently in effect
Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Exposure Settings Shutter speedApertureProgram shift
ApertureExposure compensation
ISO
Focus Settings (AFmode)
Focus area Flexible spotposition (rightleft)
Flexible spotposition (updown)
Focus Settings (MF mode)
Enlarging position(updown)
Enlarging position(rightleft)
Enlarging position(updown)
White BalanceSettings
ModeColortemperature
Color temperature(B-A)
Color temperature(G-M)
D-Range Settings DRO levelHDR level Exposure compensation Mode
Creative StyleSettings
Mode Option Option
Picture EffectSettings
Mode Option ndash
Custom Settings Custom Settings 1 mode Custom Settings 2 mode Custom Settings 3 mode
Exposure Settings is permanent and cannot be alteredPicture Effect Settings and Custom Settings cannot be selected in the default setting You can change the various settings by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings
bullbull
Triple-dial-control
ENG
10
Settings modes
This table describes the settings that can be changed for each mode choiceindicates the default setting
Focus Settings (AF mode)
Exposure Settings
Shooting mode Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Manual exposure Shutter speed Aperture ISO
Shutter Priority Shutter speed Exposure compensation ISO
Aperture Priority Aperture Exposure compensation ISO
Program Auto Program shift Exposure compensation ISO
Sets Autofocus Area
In Flexible Spot move the selection area to the right or left
In Flexible Spot rotate the dial to to move the selection area up or down Finely adjust the position by pressing topbottomrightleft
You can set an exposure compensation by turning the Control Dial R when Anti Motion Blur or Sweep Panorama is selected
bull
ENG
11
Focus Settings (MF mode)
You can set an enlarged focus selection area for manual focusing
You can adjust the scaling with Soft Key B or C
Moves the area up or down
Sets the mode
Moves the area up or downPress the topbottomrightleft to finely adjust the position
Moves the area right or left
Adjusts the color between G (green) and M (magenta)
Adjusts the color between B (blue) and A (amber)
Control Dial L
(Multi) (Multi) The camera uses the twenty-five AF areas and focuses automaticallybullWhen the Face Detection function is active AF prioritizes faces
(Center) (Center) The camera uses the AF area located in the center area exclusively
(Flexible Spot) Moves the focusing area to focus on a small subject or narrow area Press Soft Key B to bring the focusing area back to the center
White Balance Settings
Triple-dial-control
ENG
12
Control Dial L
AWB (Auto WB) The camera automatically detects a light source and adjusts the color temperature
(Daylight) If you select an option to suit a specific light source the color temperature is adjusted for the light source (preset white balance)
(Shade)
(Cloudy)
(Incandescent)
(Fluor WarmWhite)
(Fluor Cool White)
(Fluor Day White)
(Fluor Daylight)
(Flash)
(CTempFilter)
Adjusts the color temperature according to the light source Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography To select a color temperature press Soft Key B followed by turning the Control Dial L
(Custom) Allows you to use the white balance setting retained by Custom Setup
Setting the custom white balanceSelecting Custom with the Control Dial L and pressing Soft Key B will display the Custom Setup screen Hold the camera so that the white area fully covers the AF area located in the center and then press the shutter button down The calibrated values are stored for later use
ENG
13
D-Range Settings
Sets the optimum level
Sets the exposure compensation value (ndash50 EV to +50 EV)
Sets the mode
Control Wheel
(Off) Does not use DROAuto HDR
(D-Range Opt)
By dividing the image into small areas the camera analyzes the contrast of light and shade between the subject and the background producing an image with optimal brightness and gradation
(Auto HDR)Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create an image with richer gradation One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded
Control Dial L
AUTO Lv1 ndash Lv5(D-Range Opt)
The D-Range Optimizer optimizes the gradations of a recorded image in each area of the image Select the optimal level between Lv1 (weak) and Lv5 (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO setting
AUTO 10 EV ndash 60EV (Auto HDR)
Using the Auto HDR sets the exposure difference based on the contrast of the subject Select the optimal level between 10 EV (weak) and 60 EV (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO
This figure shows the histogram before the D-Range Opti-mizer or the Auto HDR is applied not that of the image that will actually be shot
Triple-dial-control
ENG
14
Control Dial L
(Standard) For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and strong colors
(Vivid) Saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers spring greenery blue sky ocean views etc
(Neutral) Saturation and sharpness are lowered for capturing images in a quiet tone This setting is also suitable for capturing images to be modified with a computer
Creative Style Settings
Sets the mode
Selects the contrast saturation or sharpness
Adjusts the contrast saturation or sharpness
Using the D-Range Settings effectivelyBy combining the DROAuto HDR manual setting (exposure difference DRO-Level) and exposure com-pensation you can control the range of the contrast of light and shade (gradations) to be reproducedWith DRO set a DRO-Level to reproduce the shadow tones and set a minus value of exposure com-pensation to reproduce the light tones A large minus compensation and DRO-Level setting may cause noise It is recommended that you check the result first by enlarging the playback image etcWith Auto HDR set the exposure difference to adjust the overall reproduction range and shift the range towards lighter tones (minus compensation) or darker tones (plus compensation) with the expo-sure compensation setting
ENG
15
(Clear) For capturing images in a clear tone to display soft colors in the lighter areas Suitable for capturing radiant light
(Deep) For capturing images with deep and intense color Suitable for capturing the solid feel of the subject
(Light) For capturing images with bright and simple range of color Suitable for capturing a light ambience and feel
(Portrait) For shooting skin tones in a soft manner Ideally suited for shooting portraits
(Landscape) Saturation contrast and sharpness are increased to produce vivid and crisp scenery Distant landscapes also stand out more
(Sunset) For capturing the intense red of sunsets
(NightScene)
Contrast is reduced to capture a nightscape that is more faithful to the actual scene
(Autumnleaves)
For capturing autumn scenes vividly highlighting the red and yellow of colored leaves
(Black ampWhite)
For shooting images in black and white monochrome
(Sepia) For capturing images in sepia monochrome
Control Wheel
(Contrast) The greater the value selected the greater the difference will be between the lighter and darker areas of the image resulting in increased impact
(Saturation) The greater the value selected the more vivid the colors will be When a lower value is selected the colors in the image become weaker and toned down
(Sharpness) The greater the value selected the more the sharpness will be emphasized The lower the value selected the softer the image will be
Triple-dial-control
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
8
Press the center of the Control Wheel and turn it to select a shooting mode from P A S or M
Press the Navigation button to select the desired settings
1
2
When Soft Key C Setting is set to Custom select a shooting mode by MENU Shoot Mode
Make each setting by turning the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
3
1
Navigation buttonEach time you press the button the item toggles as follows
You can select the settings you want to use by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings In addition to the settings shown on the left you can also select settings from Picture Effect Set-tings and Custom Settings (page 9)The Exposure Settings item is perma-nent and cannot be altered
Exposure Settings Focus Settings White Balance Settings D-Range Settings Creative Style Settings
Preventing the dials from operating incorrectly
You can lock the Control Dials LR and the Control Wheel
Hold the Navigation button downTo unlock them hold the Navigation button down againYou can choose to lock the Control Wheel only or not lock any of them by selecting MENU Setup DialWheel Lock
ENG
9
Control Dials functionsThe Control Dials and the Control Wheel have different tasks depending on the settings currently in effect
Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Exposure Settings Shutter speedApertureProgram shift
ApertureExposure compensation
ISO
Focus Settings (AFmode)
Focus area Flexible spotposition (rightleft)
Flexible spotposition (updown)
Focus Settings (MF mode)
Enlarging position(updown)
Enlarging position(rightleft)
Enlarging position(updown)
White BalanceSettings
ModeColortemperature
Color temperature(B-A)
Color temperature(G-M)
D-Range Settings DRO levelHDR level Exposure compensation Mode
Creative StyleSettings
Mode Option Option
Picture EffectSettings
Mode Option ndash
Custom Settings Custom Settings 1 mode Custom Settings 2 mode Custom Settings 3 mode
Exposure Settings is permanent and cannot be alteredPicture Effect Settings and Custom Settings cannot be selected in the default setting You can change the various settings by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings
bullbull
Triple-dial-control
ENG
10
Settings modes
This table describes the settings that can be changed for each mode choiceindicates the default setting
Focus Settings (AF mode)
Exposure Settings
Shooting mode Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Manual exposure Shutter speed Aperture ISO
Shutter Priority Shutter speed Exposure compensation ISO
Aperture Priority Aperture Exposure compensation ISO
Program Auto Program shift Exposure compensation ISO
Sets Autofocus Area
In Flexible Spot move the selection area to the right or left
In Flexible Spot rotate the dial to to move the selection area up or down Finely adjust the position by pressing topbottomrightleft
You can set an exposure compensation by turning the Control Dial R when Anti Motion Blur or Sweep Panorama is selected
bull
ENG
11
Focus Settings (MF mode)
You can set an enlarged focus selection area for manual focusing
You can adjust the scaling with Soft Key B or C
Moves the area up or down
Sets the mode
Moves the area up or downPress the topbottomrightleft to finely adjust the position
Moves the area right or left
Adjusts the color between G (green) and M (magenta)
Adjusts the color between B (blue) and A (amber)
Control Dial L
(Multi) (Multi) The camera uses the twenty-five AF areas and focuses automaticallybullWhen the Face Detection function is active AF prioritizes faces
(Center) (Center) The camera uses the AF area located in the center area exclusively
(Flexible Spot) Moves the focusing area to focus on a small subject or narrow area Press Soft Key B to bring the focusing area back to the center
White Balance Settings
Triple-dial-control
ENG
12
Control Dial L
AWB (Auto WB) The camera automatically detects a light source and adjusts the color temperature
(Daylight) If you select an option to suit a specific light source the color temperature is adjusted for the light source (preset white balance)
(Shade)
(Cloudy)
(Incandescent)
(Fluor WarmWhite)
(Fluor Cool White)
(Fluor Day White)
(Fluor Daylight)
(Flash)
(CTempFilter)
Adjusts the color temperature according to the light source Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography To select a color temperature press Soft Key B followed by turning the Control Dial L
(Custom) Allows you to use the white balance setting retained by Custom Setup
Setting the custom white balanceSelecting Custom with the Control Dial L and pressing Soft Key B will display the Custom Setup screen Hold the camera so that the white area fully covers the AF area located in the center and then press the shutter button down The calibrated values are stored for later use
ENG
13
D-Range Settings
Sets the optimum level
Sets the exposure compensation value (ndash50 EV to +50 EV)
Sets the mode
Control Wheel
(Off) Does not use DROAuto HDR
(D-Range Opt)
By dividing the image into small areas the camera analyzes the contrast of light and shade between the subject and the background producing an image with optimal brightness and gradation
(Auto HDR)Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create an image with richer gradation One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded
Control Dial L
AUTO Lv1 ndash Lv5(D-Range Opt)
The D-Range Optimizer optimizes the gradations of a recorded image in each area of the image Select the optimal level between Lv1 (weak) and Lv5 (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO setting
AUTO 10 EV ndash 60EV (Auto HDR)
Using the Auto HDR sets the exposure difference based on the contrast of the subject Select the optimal level between 10 EV (weak) and 60 EV (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO
This figure shows the histogram before the D-Range Opti-mizer or the Auto HDR is applied not that of the image that will actually be shot
Triple-dial-control
ENG
14
Control Dial L
(Standard) For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and strong colors
(Vivid) Saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers spring greenery blue sky ocean views etc
(Neutral) Saturation and sharpness are lowered for capturing images in a quiet tone This setting is also suitable for capturing images to be modified with a computer
Creative Style Settings
Sets the mode
Selects the contrast saturation or sharpness
Adjusts the contrast saturation or sharpness
Using the D-Range Settings effectivelyBy combining the DROAuto HDR manual setting (exposure difference DRO-Level) and exposure com-pensation you can control the range of the contrast of light and shade (gradations) to be reproducedWith DRO set a DRO-Level to reproduce the shadow tones and set a minus value of exposure com-pensation to reproduce the light tones A large minus compensation and DRO-Level setting may cause noise It is recommended that you check the result first by enlarging the playback image etcWith Auto HDR set the exposure difference to adjust the overall reproduction range and shift the range towards lighter tones (minus compensation) or darker tones (plus compensation) with the expo-sure compensation setting
ENG
15
(Clear) For capturing images in a clear tone to display soft colors in the lighter areas Suitable for capturing radiant light
(Deep) For capturing images with deep and intense color Suitable for capturing the solid feel of the subject
(Light) For capturing images with bright and simple range of color Suitable for capturing a light ambience and feel
(Portrait) For shooting skin tones in a soft manner Ideally suited for shooting portraits
(Landscape) Saturation contrast and sharpness are increased to produce vivid and crisp scenery Distant landscapes also stand out more
(Sunset) For capturing the intense red of sunsets
(NightScene)
Contrast is reduced to capture a nightscape that is more faithful to the actual scene
(Autumnleaves)
For capturing autumn scenes vividly highlighting the red and yellow of colored leaves
(Black ampWhite)
For shooting images in black and white monochrome
(Sepia) For capturing images in sepia monochrome
Control Wheel
(Contrast) The greater the value selected the greater the difference will be between the lighter and darker areas of the image resulting in increased impact
(Saturation) The greater the value selected the more vivid the colors will be When a lower value is selected the colors in the image become weaker and toned down
(Sharpness) The greater the value selected the more the sharpness will be emphasized The lower the value selected the softer the image will be
Triple-dial-control
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
9
Control Dials functionsThe Control Dials and the Control Wheel have different tasks depending on the settings currently in effect
Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Exposure Settings Shutter speedApertureProgram shift
ApertureExposure compensation
ISO
Focus Settings (AFmode)
Focus area Flexible spotposition (rightleft)
Flexible spotposition (updown)
Focus Settings (MF mode)
Enlarging position(updown)
Enlarging position(rightleft)
Enlarging position(updown)
White BalanceSettings
ModeColortemperature
Color temperature(B-A)
Color temperature(G-M)
D-Range Settings DRO levelHDR level Exposure compensation Mode
Creative StyleSettings
Mode Option Option
Picture EffectSettings
Mode Option ndash
Custom Settings Custom Settings 1 mode Custom Settings 2 mode Custom Settings 3 mode
Exposure Settings is permanent and cannot be alteredPicture Effect Settings and Custom Settings cannot be selected in the default setting You can change the various settings by selecting MENU Setup Function Settings
bullbull
Triple-dial-control
ENG
10
Settings modes
This table describes the settings that can be changed for each mode choiceindicates the default setting
Focus Settings (AF mode)
Exposure Settings
Shooting mode Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Manual exposure Shutter speed Aperture ISO
Shutter Priority Shutter speed Exposure compensation ISO
Aperture Priority Aperture Exposure compensation ISO
Program Auto Program shift Exposure compensation ISO
Sets Autofocus Area
In Flexible Spot move the selection area to the right or left
In Flexible Spot rotate the dial to to move the selection area up or down Finely adjust the position by pressing topbottomrightleft
You can set an exposure compensation by turning the Control Dial R when Anti Motion Blur or Sweep Panorama is selected
bull
ENG
11
Focus Settings (MF mode)
You can set an enlarged focus selection area for manual focusing
You can adjust the scaling with Soft Key B or C
Moves the area up or down
Sets the mode
Moves the area up or downPress the topbottomrightleft to finely adjust the position
Moves the area right or left
Adjusts the color between G (green) and M (magenta)
Adjusts the color between B (blue) and A (amber)
Control Dial L
(Multi) (Multi) The camera uses the twenty-five AF areas and focuses automaticallybullWhen the Face Detection function is active AF prioritizes faces
(Center) (Center) The camera uses the AF area located in the center area exclusively
(Flexible Spot) Moves the focusing area to focus on a small subject or narrow area Press Soft Key B to bring the focusing area back to the center
White Balance Settings
Triple-dial-control
ENG
12
Control Dial L
AWB (Auto WB) The camera automatically detects a light source and adjusts the color temperature
(Daylight) If you select an option to suit a specific light source the color temperature is adjusted for the light source (preset white balance)
(Shade)
(Cloudy)
(Incandescent)
(Fluor WarmWhite)
(Fluor Cool White)
(Fluor Day White)
(Fluor Daylight)
(Flash)
(CTempFilter)
Adjusts the color temperature according to the light source Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography To select a color temperature press Soft Key B followed by turning the Control Dial L
(Custom) Allows you to use the white balance setting retained by Custom Setup
Setting the custom white balanceSelecting Custom with the Control Dial L and pressing Soft Key B will display the Custom Setup screen Hold the camera so that the white area fully covers the AF area located in the center and then press the shutter button down The calibrated values are stored for later use
ENG
13
D-Range Settings
Sets the optimum level
Sets the exposure compensation value (ndash50 EV to +50 EV)
Sets the mode
Control Wheel
(Off) Does not use DROAuto HDR
(D-Range Opt)
By dividing the image into small areas the camera analyzes the contrast of light and shade between the subject and the background producing an image with optimal brightness and gradation
(Auto HDR)Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create an image with richer gradation One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded
Control Dial L
AUTO Lv1 ndash Lv5(D-Range Opt)
The D-Range Optimizer optimizes the gradations of a recorded image in each area of the image Select the optimal level between Lv1 (weak) and Lv5 (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO setting
AUTO 10 EV ndash 60EV (Auto HDR)
Using the Auto HDR sets the exposure difference based on the contrast of the subject Select the optimal level between 10 EV (weak) and 60 EV (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO
This figure shows the histogram before the D-Range Opti-mizer or the Auto HDR is applied not that of the image that will actually be shot
Triple-dial-control
ENG
14
Control Dial L
(Standard) For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and strong colors
(Vivid) Saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers spring greenery blue sky ocean views etc
(Neutral) Saturation and sharpness are lowered for capturing images in a quiet tone This setting is also suitable for capturing images to be modified with a computer
Creative Style Settings
Sets the mode
Selects the contrast saturation or sharpness
Adjusts the contrast saturation or sharpness
Using the D-Range Settings effectivelyBy combining the DROAuto HDR manual setting (exposure difference DRO-Level) and exposure com-pensation you can control the range of the contrast of light and shade (gradations) to be reproducedWith DRO set a DRO-Level to reproduce the shadow tones and set a minus value of exposure com-pensation to reproduce the light tones A large minus compensation and DRO-Level setting may cause noise It is recommended that you check the result first by enlarging the playback image etcWith Auto HDR set the exposure difference to adjust the overall reproduction range and shift the range towards lighter tones (minus compensation) or darker tones (plus compensation) with the expo-sure compensation setting
ENG
15
(Clear) For capturing images in a clear tone to display soft colors in the lighter areas Suitable for capturing radiant light
(Deep) For capturing images with deep and intense color Suitable for capturing the solid feel of the subject
(Light) For capturing images with bright and simple range of color Suitable for capturing a light ambience and feel
(Portrait) For shooting skin tones in a soft manner Ideally suited for shooting portraits
(Landscape) Saturation contrast and sharpness are increased to produce vivid and crisp scenery Distant landscapes also stand out more
(Sunset) For capturing the intense red of sunsets
(NightScene)
Contrast is reduced to capture a nightscape that is more faithful to the actual scene
(Autumnleaves)
For capturing autumn scenes vividly highlighting the red and yellow of colored leaves
(Black ampWhite)
For shooting images in black and white monochrome
(Sepia) For capturing images in sepia monochrome
Control Wheel
(Contrast) The greater the value selected the greater the difference will be between the lighter and darker areas of the image resulting in increased impact
(Saturation) The greater the value selected the more vivid the colors will be When a lower value is selected the colors in the image become weaker and toned down
(Sharpness) The greater the value selected the more the sharpness will be emphasized The lower the value selected the softer the image will be
Triple-dial-control
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
10
Settings modes
This table describes the settings that can be changed for each mode choiceindicates the default setting
Focus Settings (AF mode)
Exposure Settings
Shooting mode Control Dial L Control Dial R Control Wheel
Manual exposure Shutter speed Aperture ISO
Shutter Priority Shutter speed Exposure compensation ISO
Aperture Priority Aperture Exposure compensation ISO
Program Auto Program shift Exposure compensation ISO
Sets Autofocus Area
In Flexible Spot move the selection area to the right or left
In Flexible Spot rotate the dial to to move the selection area up or down Finely adjust the position by pressing topbottomrightleft
You can set an exposure compensation by turning the Control Dial R when Anti Motion Blur or Sweep Panorama is selected
bull
ENG
11
Focus Settings (MF mode)
You can set an enlarged focus selection area for manual focusing
You can adjust the scaling with Soft Key B or C
Moves the area up or down
Sets the mode
Moves the area up or downPress the topbottomrightleft to finely adjust the position
Moves the area right or left
Adjusts the color between G (green) and M (magenta)
Adjusts the color between B (blue) and A (amber)
Control Dial L
(Multi) (Multi) The camera uses the twenty-five AF areas and focuses automaticallybullWhen the Face Detection function is active AF prioritizes faces
(Center) (Center) The camera uses the AF area located in the center area exclusively
(Flexible Spot) Moves the focusing area to focus on a small subject or narrow area Press Soft Key B to bring the focusing area back to the center
White Balance Settings
Triple-dial-control
ENG
12
Control Dial L
AWB (Auto WB) The camera automatically detects a light source and adjusts the color temperature
(Daylight) If you select an option to suit a specific light source the color temperature is adjusted for the light source (preset white balance)
(Shade)
(Cloudy)
(Incandescent)
(Fluor WarmWhite)
(Fluor Cool White)
(Fluor Day White)
(Fluor Daylight)
(Flash)
(CTempFilter)
Adjusts the color temperature according to the light source Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography To select a color temperature press Soft Key B followed by turning the Control Dial L
(Custom) Allows you to use the white balance setting retained by Custom Setup
Setting the custom white balanceSelecting Custom with the Control Dial L and pressing Soft Key B will display the Custom Setup screen Hold the camera so that the white area fully covers the AF area located in the center and then press the shutter button down The calibrated values are stored for later use
ENG
13
D-Range Settings
Sets the optimum level
Sets the exposure compensation value (ndash50 EV to +50 EV)
Sets the mode
Control Wheel
(Off) Does not use DROAuto HDR
(D-Range Opt)
By dividing the image into small areas the camera analyzes the contrast of light and shade between the subject and the background producing an image with optimal brightness and gradation
(Auto HDR)Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create an image with richer gradation One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded
Control Dial L
AUTO Lv1 ndash Lv5(D-Range Opt)
The D-Range Optimizer optimizes the gradations of a recorded image in each area of the image Select the optimal level between Lv1 (weak) and Lv5 (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO setting
AUTO 10 EV ndash 60EV (Auto HDR)
Using the Auto HDR sets the exposure difference based on the contrast of the subject Select the optimal level between 10 EV (weak) and 60 EV (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO
This figure shows the histogram before the D-Range Opti-mizer or the Auto HDR is applied not that of the image that will actually be shot
Triple-dial-control
ENG
14
Control Dial L
(Standard) For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and strong colors
(Vivid) Saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers spring greenery blue sky ocean views etc
(Neutral) Saturation and sharpness are lowered for capturing images in a quiet tone This setting is also suitable for capturing images to be modified with a computer
Creative Style Settings
Sets the mode
Selects the contrast saturation or sharpness
Adjusts the contrast saturation or sharpness
Using the D-Range Settings effectivelyBy combining the DROAuto HDR manual setting (exposure difference DRO-Level) and exposure com-pensation you can control the range of the contrast of light and shade (gradations) to be reproducedWith DRO set a DRO-Level to reproduce the shadow tones and set a minus value of exposure com-pensation to reproduce the light tones A large minus compensation and DRO-Level setting may cause noise It is recommended that you check the result first by enlarging the playback image etcWith Auto HDR set the exposure difference to adjust the overall reproduction range and shift the range towards lighter tones (minus compensation) or darker tones (plus compensation) with the expo-sure compensation setting
ENG
15
(Clear) For capturing images in a clear tone to display soft colors in the lighter areas Suitable for capturing radiant light
(Deep) For capturing images with deep and intense color Suitable for capturing the solid feel of the subject
(Light) For capturing images with bright and simple range of color Suitable for capturing a light ambience and feel
(Portrait) For shooting skin tones in a soft manner Ideally suited for shooting portraits
(Landscape) Saturation contrast and sharpness are increased to produce vivid and crisp scenery Distant landscapes also stand out more
(Sunset) For capturing the intense red of sunsets
(NightScene)
Contrast is reduced to capture a nightscape that is more faithful to the actual scene
(Autumnleaves)
For capturing autumn scenes vividly highlighting the red and yellow of colored leaves
(Black ampWhite)
For shooting images in black and white monochrome
(Sepia) For capturing images in sepia monochrome
Control Wheel
(Contrast) The greater the value selected the greater the difference will be between the lighter and darker areas of the image resulting in increased impact
(Saturation) The greater the value selected the more vivid the colors will be When a lower value is selected the colors in the image become weaker and toned down
(Sharpness) The greater the value selected the more the sharpness will be emphasized The lower the value selected the softer the image will be
Triple-dial-control
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
11
Focus Settings (MF mode)
You can set an enlarged focus selection area for manual focusing
You can adjust the scaling with Soft Key B or C
Moves the area up or down
Sets the mode
Moves the area up or downPress the topbottomrightleft to finely adjust the position
Moves the area right or left
Adjusts the color between G (green) and M (magenta)
Adjusts the color between B (blue) and A (amber)
Control Dial L
(Multi) (Multi) The camera uses the twenty-five AF areas and focuses automaticallybullWhen the Face Detection function is active AF prioritizes faces
(Center) (Center) The camera uses the AF area located in the center area exclusively
(Flexible Spot) Moves the focusing area to focus on a small subject or narrow area Press Soft Key B to bring the focusing area back to the center
White Balance Settings
Triple-dial-control
ENG
12
Control Dial L
AWB (Auto WB) The camera automatically detects a light source and adjusts the color temperature
(Daylight) If you select an option to suit a specific light source the color temperature is adjusted for the light source (preset white balance)
(Shade)
(Cloudy)
(Incandescent)
(Fluor WarmWhite)
(Fluor Cool White)
(Fluor Day White)
(Fluor Daylight)
(Flash)
(CTempFilter)
Adjusts the color temperature according to the light source Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography To select a color temperature press Soft Key B followed by turning the Control Dial L
(Custom) Allows you to use the white balance setting retained by Custom Setup
Setting the custom white balanceSelecting Custom with the Control Dial L and pressing Soft Key B will display the Custom Setup screen Hold the camera so that the white area fully covers the AF area located in the center and then press the shutter button down The calibrated values are stored for later use
ENG
13
D-Range Settings
Sets the optimum level
Sets the exposure compensation value (ndash50 EV to +50 EV)
Sets the mode
Control Wheel
(Off) Does not use DROAuto HDR
(D-Range Opt)
By dividing the image into small areas the camera analyzes the contrast of light and shade between the subject and the background producing an image with optimal brightness and gradation
(Auto HDR)Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create an image with richer gradation One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded
Control Dial L
AUTO Lv1 ndash Lv5(D-Range Opt)
The D-Range Optimizer optimizes the gradations of a recorded image in each area of the image Select the optimal level between Lv1 (weak) and Lv5 (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO setting
AUTO 10 EV ndash 60EV (Auto HDR)
Using the Auto HDR sets the exposure difference based on the contrast of the subject Select the optimal level between 10 EV (weak) and 60 EV (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO
This figure shows the histogram before the D-Range Opti-mizer or the Auto HDR is applied not that of the image that will actually be shot
Triple-dial-control
ENG
14
Control Dial L
(Standard) For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and strong colors
(Vivid) Saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers spring greenery blue sky ocean views etc
(Neutral) Saturation and sharpness are lowered for capturing images in a quiet tone This setting is also suitable for capturing images to be modified with a computer
Creative Style Settings
Sets the mode
Selects the contrast saturation or sharpness
Adjusts the contrast saturation or sharpness
Using the D-Range Settings effectivelyBy combining the DROAuto HDR manual setting (exposure difference DRO-Level) and exposure com-pensation you can control the range of the contrast of light and shade (gradations) to be reproducedWith DRO set a DRO-Level to reproduce the shadow tones and set a minus value of exposure com-pensation to reproduce the light tones A large minus compensation and DRO-Level setting may cause noise It is recommended that you check the result first by enlarging the playback image etcWith Auto HDR set the exposure difference to adjust the overall reproduction range and shift the range towards lighter tones (minus compensation) or darker tones (plus compensation) with the expo-sure compensation setting
ENG
15
(Clear) For capturing images in a clear tone to display soft colors in the lighter areas Suitable for capturing radiant light
(Deep) For capturing images with deep and intense color Suitable for capturing the solid feel of the subject
(Light) For capturing images with bright and simple range of color Suitable for capturing a light ambience and feel
(Portrait) For shooting skin tones in a soft manner Ideally suited for shooting portraits
(Landscape) Saturation contrast and sharpness are increased to produce vivid and crisp scenery Distant landscapes also stand out more
(Sunset) For capturing the intense red of sunsets
(NightScene)
Contrast is reduced to capture a nightscape that is more faithful to the actual scene
(Autumnleaves)
For capturing autumn scenes vividly highlighting the red and yellow of colored leaves
(Black ampWhite)
For shooting images in black and white monochrome
(Sepia) For capturing images in sepia monochrome
Control Wheel
(Contrast) The greater the value selected the greater the difference will be between the lighter and darker areas of the image resulting in increased impact
(Saturation) The greater the value selected the more vivid the colors will be When a lower value is selected the colors in the image become weaker and toned down
(Sharpness) The greater the value selected the more the sharpness will be emphasized The lower the value selected the softer the image will be
Triple-dial-control
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
12
Control Dial L
AWB (Auto WB) The camera automatically detects a light source and adjusts the color temperature
(Daylight) If you select an option to suit a specific light source the color temperature is adjusted for the light source (preset white balance)
(Shade)
(Cloudy)
(Incandescent)
(Fluor WarmWhite)
(Fluor Cool White)
(Fluor Day White)
(Fluor Daylight)
(Flash)
(CTempFilter)
Adjusts the color temperature according to the light source Achieves the effect of CC (Color Compensation) filters for photography To select a color temperature press Soft Key B followed by turning the Control Dial L
(Custom) Allows you to use the white balance setting retained by Custom Setup
Setting the custom white balanceSelecting Custom with the Control Dial L and pressing Soft Key B will display the Custom Setup screen Hold the camera so that the white area fully covers the AF area located in the center and then press the shutter button down The calibrated values are stored for later use
ENG
13
D-Range Settings
Sets the optimum level
Sets the exposure compensation value (ndash50 EV to +50 EV)
Sets the mode
Control Wheel
(Off) Does not use DROAuto HDR
(D-Range Opt)
By dividing the image into small areas the camera analyzes the contrast of light and shade between the subject and the background producing an image with optimal brightness and gradation
(Auto HDR)Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create an image with richer gradation One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded
Control Dial L
AUTO Lv1 ndash Lv5(D-Range Opt)
The D-Range Optimizer optimizes the gradations of a recorded image in each area of the image Select the optimal level between Lv1 (weak) and Lv5 (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO setting
AUTO 10 EV ndash 60EV (Auto HDR)
Using the Auto HDR sets the exposure difference based on the contrast of the subject Select the optimal level between 10 EV (weak) and 60 EV (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO
This figure shows the histogram before the D-Range Opti-mizer or the Auto HDR is applied not that of the image that will actually be shot
Triple-dial-control
ENG
14
Control Dial L
(Standard) For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and strong colors
(Vivid) Saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers spring greenery blue sky ocean views etc
(Neutral) Saturation and sharpness are lowered for capturing images in a quiet tone This setting is also suitable for capturing images to be modified with a computer
Creative Style Settings
Sets the mode
Selects the contrast saturation or sharpness
Adjusts the contrast saturation or sharpness
Using the D-Range Settings effectivelyBy combining the DROAuto HDR manual setting (exposure difference DRO-Level) and exposure com-pensation you can control the range of the contrast of light and shade (gradations) to be reproducedWith DRO set a DRO-Level to reproduce the shadow tones and set a minus value of exposure com-pensation to reproduce the light tones A large minus compensation and DRO-Level setting may cause noise It is recommended that you check the result first by enlarging the playback image etcWith Auto HDR set the exposure difference to adjust the overall reproduction range and shift the range towards lighter tones (minus compensation) or darker tones (plus compensation) with the expo-sure compensation setting
ENG
15
(Clear) For capturing images in a clear tone to display soft colors in the lighter areas Suitable for capturing radiant light
(Deep) For capturing images with deep and intense color Suitable for capturing the solid feel of the subject
(Light) For capturing images with bright and simple range of color Suitable for capturing a light ambience and feel
(Portrait) For shooting skin tones in a soft manner Ideally suited for shooting portraits
(Landscape) Saturation contrast and sharpness are increased to produce vivid and crisp scenery Distant landscapes also stand out more
(Sunset) For capturing the intense red of sunsets
(NightScene)
Contrast is reduced to capture a nightscape that is more faithful to the actual scene
(Autumnleaves)
For capturing autumn scenes vividly highlighting the red and yellow of colored leaves
(Black ampWhite)
For shooting images in black and white monochrome
(Sepia) For capturing images in sepia monochrome
Control Wheel
(Contrast) The greater the value selected the greater the difference will be between the lighter and darker areas of the image resulting in increased impact
(Saturation) The greater the value selected the more vivid the colors will be When a lower value is selected the colors in the image become weaker and toned down
(Sharpness) The greater the value selected the more the sharpness will be emphasized The lower the value selected the softer the image will be
Triple-dial-control
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
13
D-Range Settings
Sets the optimum level
Sets the exposure compensation value (ndash50 EV to +50 EV)
Sets the mode
Control Wheel
(Off) Does not use DROAuto HDR
(D-Range Opt)
By dividing the image into small areas the camera analyzes the contrast of light and shade between the subject and the background producing an image with optimal brightness and gradation
(Auto HDR)Shoots three images with different exposures and then overlays the bright area of the underexposed image and the dark area of the overexposed image to create an image with richer gradation One image with proper exposure and one overlaid image are recorded
Control Dial L
AUTO Lv1 ndash Lv5(D-Range Opt)
The D-Range Optimizer optimizes the gradations of a recorded image in each area of the image Select the optimal level between Lv1 (weak) and Lv5 (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO setting
AUTO 10 EV ndash 60EV (Auto HDR)
Using the Auto HDR sets the exposure difference based on the contrast of the subject Select the optimal level between 10 EV (weak) and 60 EV (strong) Automatically adjusted at AUTO
This figure shows the histogram before the D-Range Opti-mizer or the Auto HDR is applied not that of the image that will actually be shot
Triple-dial-control
ENG
14
Control Dial L
(Standard) For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and strong colors
(Vivid) Saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers spring greenery blue sky ocean views etc
(Neutral) Saturation and sharpness are lowered for capturing images in a quiet tone This setting is also suitable for capturing images to be modified with a computer
Creative Style Settings
Sets the mode
Selects the contrast saturation or sharpness
Adjusts the contrast saturation or sharpness
Using the D-Range Settings effectivelyBy combining the DROAuto HDR manual setting (exposure difference DRO-Level) and exposure com-pensation you can control the range of the contrast of light and shade (gradations) to be reproducedWith DRO set a DRO-Level to reproduce the shadow tones and set a minus value of exposure com-pensation to reproduce the light tones A large minus compensation and DRO-Level setting may cause noise It is recommended that you check the result first by enlarging the playback image etcWith Auto HDR set the exposure difference to adjust the overall reproduction range and shift the range towards lighter tones (minus compensation) or darker tones (plus compensation) with the expo-sure compensation setting
ENG
15
(Clear) For capturing images in a clear tone to display soft colors in the lighter areas Suitable for capturing radiant light
(Deep) For capturing images with deep and intense color Suitable for capturing the solid feel of the subject
(Light) For capturing images with bright and simple range of color Suitable for capturing a light ambience and feel
(Portrait) For shooting skin tones in a soft manner Ideally suited for shooting portraits
(Landscape) Saturation contrast and sharpness are increased to produce vivid and crisp scenery Distant landscapes also stand out more
(Sunset) For capturing the intense red of sunsets
(NightScene)
Contrast is reduced to capture a nightscape that is more faithful to the actual scene
(Autumnleaves)
For capturing autumn scenes vividly highlighting the red and yellow of colored leaves
(Black ampWhite)
For shooting images in black and white monochrome
(Sepia) For capturing images in sepia monochrome
Control Wheel
(Contrast) The greater the value selected the greater the difference will be between the lighter and darker areas of the image resulting in increased impact
(Saturation) The greater the value selected the more vivid the colors will be When a lower value is selected the colors in the image become weaker and toned down
(Sharpness) The greater the value selected the more the sharpness will be emphasized The lower the value selected the softer the image will be
Triple-dial-control
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
14
Control Dial L
(Standard) For shooting various scenes with rich gradation and strong colors
(Vivid) Saturation and contrast are heightened for shooting striking images of colorful scenes and subjects such as flowers spring greenery blue sky ocean views etc
(Neutral) Saturation and sharpness are lowered for capturing images in a quiet tone This setting is also suitable for capturing images to be modified with a computer
Creative Style Settings
Sets the mode
Selects the contrast saturation or sharpness
Adjusts the contrast saturation or sharpness
Using the D-Range Settings effectivelyBy combining the DROAuto HDR manual setting (exposure difference DRO-Level) and exposure com-pensation you can control the range of the contrast of light and shade (gradations) to be reproducedWith DRO set a DRO-Level to reproduce the shadow tones and set a minus value of exposure com-pensation to reproduce the light tones A large minus compensation and DRO-Level setting may cause noise It is recommended that you check the result first by enlarging the playback image etcWith Auto HDR set the exposure difference to adjust the overall reproduction range and shift the range towards lighter tones (minus compensation) or darker tones (plus compensation) with the expo-sure compensation setting
ENG
15
(Clear) For capturing images in a clear tone to display soft colors in the lighter areas Suitable for capturing radiant light
(Deep) For capturing images with deep and intense color Suitable for capturing the solid feel of the subject
(Light) For capturing images with bright and simple range of color Suitable for capturing a light ambience and feel
(Portrait) For shooting skin tones in a soft manner Ideally suited for shooting portraits
(Landscape) Saturation contrast and sharpness are increased to produce vivid and crisp scenery Distant landscapes also stand out more
(Sunset) For capturing the intense red of sunsets
(NightScene)
Contrast is reduced to capture a nightscape that is more faithful to the actual scene
(Autumnleaves)
For capturing autumn scenes vividly highlighting the red and yellow of colored leaves
(Black ampWhite)
For shooting images in black and white monochrome
(Sepia) For capturing images in sepia monochrome
Control Wheel
(Contrast) The greater the value selected the greater the difference will be between the lighter and darker areas of the image resulting in increased impact
(Saturation) The greater the value selected the more vivid the colors will be When a lower value is selected the colors in the image become weaker and toned down
(Sharpness) The greater the value selected the more the sharpness will be emphasized The lower the value selected the softer the image will be
Triple-dial-control
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
15
(Clear) For capturing images in a clear tone to display soft colors in the lighter areas Suitable for capturing radiant light
(Deep) For capturing images with deep and intense color Suitable for capturing the solid feel of the subject
(Light) For capturing images with bright and simple range of color Suitable for capturing a light ambience and feel
(Portrait) For shooting skin tones in a soft manner Ideally suited for shooting portraits
(Landscape) Saturation contrast and sharpness are increased to produce vivid and crisp scenery Distant landscapes also stand out more
(Sunset) For capturing the intense red of sunsets
(NightScene)
Contrast is reduced to capture a nightscape that is more faithful to the actual scene
(Autumnleaves)
For capturing autumn scenes vividly highlighting the red and yellow of colored leaves
(Black ampWhite)
For shooting images in black and white monochrome
(Sepia) For capturing images in sepia monochrome
Control Wheel
(Contrast) The greater the value selected the greater the difference will be between the lighter and darker areas of the image resulting in increased impact
(Saturation) The greater the value selected the more vivid the colors will be When a lower value is selected the colors in the image become weaker and toned down
(Sharpness) The greater the value selected the more the sharpness will be emphasized The lower the value selected the softer the image will be
Triple-dial-control
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
16
Picture Effects Settings
Sets the mode
Sets the option
Control Dial L
(Off) Does not use the Picture Effect function
(Toy Camera) Creates the look of a Toy Camera photo with shaded corners and pronounced colorsYou can set the color tone with the Control Dial R
(Pop Color) Creates a vivid look by emphasizing color tones
(Posterization) Creates a high contrast abstract look by heavily emphasizing primary colors or black and white tonesYou can select primary colors or black and white with the Control Dial R
(Retro Photo) Creates the look of an old photo with sepia color tones and faded contrast
(Soft High-key) Creates an image with the indicated atmosphere bright transparent ethereal tender soft
(Partial Color) Creates an image which retains a specific color but converts others to black and whiteYou can select a color with the Control Dial R
(High Contrast Mono)
Creates a high-contrast image in black and white
(Soft Focus) Creates an image filled with a soft lighting effectYou can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
17
(HDR Painting) Creates the look of a painting enhancing the colors and details The camera makes three captures You can set the intensity of the effect with the Control Dial R
(Rich-tone Mono)
Creates an image in black and white displaying rich gradation of tone and repro-duction of details The camera makes three captures
(Miniature) Creates an image which produces the effect often found in pictures of miniature models with the background defocused considerablyYou can select the area to be in focus with the Control Dial R Focus of other areas is greatly reduced
Custom Settings
If you select Custom Settings you can assign a different function to each of the Control Dial LR and the Control WheelSelect MENU Setup either one of Function Settings 1 to 4 Custom Settings Then select either one of Custom Settings 1 to 3 and the function you want to assign and call it up when shooting
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 1 The default setting is White Balance
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 2 The default setting is DROAuto HDR
Changes the mode of the function assigned to Custom Settings 3 The default setting is Creative Style
When Creative Style or White Balance is assigned to Custom Settings 3 you can make a fine adjustment with Soft Key B
Triple-dial-control
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
18
2
3
4
1
Assigning functions to the custom keys
You can assign the functions you use frequently to the right key of the Control Wheel Soft Key C Soft Key B and AF MF button
Select MENU
Select Setup Custom Key Settings
Select the function to be assigned
Press the key to call up the function assigned to the key
AFMF button
Soft key CSoft Key B
Right key
MENU
Custom key assignmentYou can assign the functions you frequently use to any one of four keys This is useful as you can call up the function by just pressing the key
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
19
Functions that can be assignedThe functions that can be assigned to each key are as follows
indicates the default setting
AFMF Button
Right Key Setting
Custom Key Setting
Shoot Mode White Balance
AFMF Select Metering Mode
Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR
Autofocus Area Picture Effect
Precision Dig Zoom Creative Style
Face Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
AFMF control
MF Assist
Focus Settings
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
20
Shoot Mode White BalanceAFMF Select Metering Mode Autofocus Mode DROAuto HDR Autofocus Area Picture Effect Precision Dig Zoom Creative StyleFace Detection Flash Mode
Smile Shutter Flash Compensation
Soft Skin Effect MF Assist
Quality Focus Settings
ISO Not set
Soft Key B Setting
Soft key C Setting
Shoot Mode
Custom
(Custom) setting of (Soft Key C Setting)
You can set this item when you set Soft key C Set-ting to Custom The selected items are displayed at the bottom of the screen when you select CUSTOM with Soft key C (the center of the Con-trol Wheel) Select the desired item by pressing rightleft on the Control Wheel
Custom items (Custom 1 to 5)
AFMF Select
Autofocus Mode
Autofocus Area
Face Detection
Smile Shutter
Soft Skin Effect
Quality
ISO (Custom 1 default setting)
White Balance (Custom 2 default setting)
Metering Mode
DROAuto HDR (Custom 3 default setting)
Picture Effect
Creative Style
Flash Mode
Not set (Custom 45 default setting)
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
21
Switching the focusing mode with the AFMF button
The focusing mode switches from auto or direct manual to manual and from manual to auto
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AFMFThe button becomes the AFMF button
Press the AFMF buttonThe focusing mode switches while the button is held down (the default setting) You can keep the focusing mode switched even if you remove your finger from the button by selecting MENU Setup AFMF control
1
2
AFM
F buttonAEL button
Useful functions in manual focusing modeYou can select the following items by selecting MENU Setup
MF AssistEnlarges the image to make manual focusing easier The image is enlarged by 59 times or 117 times You can also use this with the direct manual focus function
Peaking LevelPeaking ColorEnhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color and allows you to confirm the focus easily
AFMF buttonAEL button You can switch the focusing mode between auto and manual temporarily with the AFMF button You can lock the AE with the AEL button
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
22
Set the AFMFAEL switch lever to AELThe button becomes the AEL (AE lock) button
Focus on the area for which you want to set the exposure
Press the AEL buttonThe exposure is locked and (AE lock) lights up
Hold the AEL button down focus on your desired subject and shootYou can keep the AE locked until you press the AEL button again by selecting MENU Setup AEL
Locking AE with the AEL button
1
2
3
4
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
23
You can select and use various functions from the menuWhen you press MENU six menu items ndash Shoot Mode Camera Image Size BrightnessColor Playback and Setup ndash appear on the screenYou can set various functions for each item Items that cannot be set in the context are displayed in gray
Menu list
Shoot Mode
Allows you to select a shooting mode such as exposure mode panoramicScene Selection
Intelligent AutoManual ExposureShutter PriorityAperture PriorityProgram Auto
Scene Selection PortraitLandscapeMacroSports ActionSunsetNight PortraitNight SceneHand-held Twilight
Anti Motion Blur See page 33
Sweep Panorama See page 32
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size General
General Here you will find all the setting items available (Menu) certain unique functions the screen display specifications etc
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
24
Camera
Allows you to set shooting functions such as continuous shooting self-timer remote-control shoot-ing and flash
Drive Mode Single ShootingCont ShootingSpd Priority Cont Self-timerSelf-timer(Cont) Bracket ContRemote Cdr
Flash Mode Flash OffAutoflashFill-flashSlow SyncRear Sync Wireless
AFMF Select AutofocusDMFManual Focus
Autofocus Area MultiCenterFlexible Spot
Autofocus Mode Autofocus Mode Single-shot AFContinuous AF
Object Tracking OnOff
Prec Dig Zoom Max 10 times
Face Detection On (Regist Faces)OnOff
Face Registration New RegistrationOrder ExchangingDeleteDelete All
Smile Shutter OnOff
Soft Skin Effect OnOff
LCD Display (DISP) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Finder Display (DISP) Display(DISP) Disp Basic InfoLevelHistogram
DISP Button (Monitor) Graphic DisplayDisplay All InfoBig Font Size DispNo Disp InfoLive View PriorityLevel HistogramFor viewfinder
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
25
Image Size
Allows you to set the image size and aspect ratio etc
Still
Image Size 32 L 24MM 12MS 6M169 L 20MM 10MS 51M
Aspect Ratio 32169
Quality RAWRAW amp JPEGFineStandard
Panorama
Image Size StandardWide
Panorama Direction RightLeftUpDown
Movie
File Format AVCHD1)MP4
Record Setting AVCHD 24M (FX)2)17M (FH)2)28M (PS)3)24M(FX)4)17M (FH)4)
MP4 1440times1080 12MVGA 3M
The interlace or progressive figure varies depending on the countriesregions1) 60i60p or 50i50p2) 60i or 50i3) 60p or 50p4) 24p or 25p
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
26
BrightnessColor
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Exposure Comp ndash50EV to +50EV
ISO ISO AUTO100 - 16000
White Balance Auto WBDaylightShadeCloudyIncandescent Fluor Warm WhiteFluor Cool WhiteFluor Day WhiteFluor DaylightFlashCTempFilterCustom Custom Setup
Metering Mode MultiCenterSpot
Flash Comp ndash30EV to +30EV
DROAuto HDR OffD-Range OptAuto HDR
Picture Effect OffToy CameraPop ColorPosterizationRetro PhotoSoft High-keyPartial ColorHigh Contrast MonoSoft FocusHDR PaintingRich-tone Mono Miniature
Creative Style StandardVividNeutralClearDeepLightPortrait LandscapeSunsetNight SceneAutumn leavesBlack amp WhiteSepia
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
27
Allows you to make brightness settings such as metering mode and color settings such as white balance
Playback
Allows you to set playback functions
Delete Multiple ImgAll in FolderAll AVCHD view files
Slide Show RepeatIntervalImage Type
View Mode Folder View (Still)Folder View (MP4)AVCHD View
Image Index 6 Images12 Images
Rotate Counterclockwise
Protect Multiple ImgCancel All ImagesCancel AllMovies(MP4)Cancel All AVCHD view files
Enlarge Image Enlarges the playback image
Volume Settings 0 to 7
Specify Printing DPOF SetupDate Imprint
Display Contents Displays InfoHistogramNo Disp Info
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
General
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
28
Setup
Allows you to make more detailed shooting settings or change the camera settings
Shooting Settings
AEL Sets how the AEL button works(HoldToggle)
AFMF control Sets how the AMFM button works(HoldToggle)
DialWheel Lock Sets whether or not to lock the Control Dials and the Control Wheel(AllControl WheelOff)
AF Illuminator Sets the AF illuminator to assist auto-focusing in poorly lit situations(AutoOff)
Red Eye Reduction Provides a pre-flash before shooting with flash to prevent red-eye results(OnOff)
FINDERLCD Setting Sets how to switch between the viewfinder and the LCD monitor(AutoViewfinderLCD Monitor)
Live View Display Allows you to choose whether or not to show the exposure compensation values etc on the screen display(Setting Effect ONSetting Effect OFF)
Auto Review Sets the display time of the image directly after shooting(10 Sec5 Sec2 SecOff)
Grid Line Turns on the grid line that helps you to adjust the composition of images(Rule of 3rds GridSquare GridDiag + Square Grid Off)
Menu
Color
Shoot Mode
BrightnessPlayback Setup
Camera Image Size
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
29
Peaking Level Enhances the outline of in-focus ranges with a specific color(HighMidLowOff)
Peaking Color Sets the color used for the peaking function(WhiteRedYellow)
MF Assist Displays an enlarged image when focusing manually(OnOff)
MF Assist Time Sets the length of time the image will be displayed in an enlarged form(No Limit5 Sec2 Sec)
Color Space Changes the range of color reproduction(sRGBAdobeRGB)
SteadyShot Sets camera shake compensation(OnOff)
Release wo Lens Sets whether or not to release the shutter when there is no lens attached(EnableDisable)
Eye-Start AF Sets whether or not to use autofocus when you look through the viewfinder when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (sold separately)(OnOff)
Front Curtain Shutter Sets whether or not to use the electronic front curtain shutter function(OnOff)
Long Exposure NR Activates noise reduction processing for long exposure shootings(OnOff)
High ISO NR Activates noise reduction processing for high ISO sensitivity shootings(HighNormalLow)
Lens Comp Shading Compensates for the shaded corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp ChroAber
Reduces color deviation at the corners of the screen(AutoOff)
Lens Comp Distortion Compensates for lens distortion(AutoOff)
Movie Audio Rec Sets the sound for movie recording(OnOff)
Wind Noise Reduct Reduces wind noise during movie recording(OnOff)
AF Micro Adj Finely adjusts the autofocused position when using the LA-EA2 Mount Adaptor (optional accessory)(AF Adjustment SettingamountClear)
General
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
30
Main Settings
Menu start Selects a first-displayed menu from the top menu or the last menu screen(TopPrevious)
Function Settings Sets the functions to call up the Triple-dial-control(Function Settings 1 to 4Custom Settings 1 to 3Function Settings Start)
Custom Key Settings Assigns functions to the various keys(AFMF buttonRight Key SettingSoft Key B SettingSoft key C SettingCustom)
Beep Selects the sound produced when you operate the camera(OnOff)
Language Selects the language used on the screen
DateTime Setup Sets the date and time
Area Setting Selects the geographical area where you are using the camera
Help Guide Display Turns the Help Guide on or off(OnOff)
Power Save Sets the active time period before the camera enters power save mode(30 Min5 Min1 Min20 Sec10 Sec)
LCD Brightness Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor(AutoManualSunny Weather)
Viewfinder Bright Sets the brightness of the viewfinder(AutoManual)
Display Color Selects the color of the LCD monitor(BlackWhite)
Wide Image Selects a method to display wide images(Full ScreenNormal)
Playback Display Selects the method used to play back portrait images(Auto RotateManual Rotate)
HDMI Resolution Sets resolution when connected to HDMI TV(Auto1080p1080i)
CTRL FOR HDMI Sets whether or not to operate the camera with a ldquoBRAVIArdquo Sync-compliant TVrsquos Remote Control(OnOff)
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
31
USB Connection Selects the method used for a USB connection(AutoMass StorageMTP)
Cleaning Mode Allows you to clean the image sensor
Version Displays the version of the camera and the lens
Demo Mode Sets whether or not to display the demonstration with movies(OnOff)
Reset Default Resets the camera to the factory-settings
Memory Card Tool
Format Formats the memory card
File Number Selects the method used for assigning file numbers to images(SeriesReset)
Folder Name Selects the folder name format(Standard FormDate Form)
Select Shoot Folder Selects the recording folder
New Folder Creates a new folder
Recover Image DB Repairs the image database file when inconsistencies are found
Display Card Space Displays the remaining recording time of movies and the number of still images pos-sible to record on the memory card
Eye-Fi Setup
Upload Settings Sets the upload function of the camera when an Eye-Fi card is used (OnOff)
Appears when an Eye-Fi card (optional accessory) is inserted in the camera Do not use an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera on an airplane If there is an Eye-Fi card inserted in the camera set Upload Settings to Off Eye-Fi cards can be used only in the countriesregions where they were purchased Use Eye-Fi cards in accordance with the law of the countriesregions where you purchased the card
General
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
32
When you pan or tilt the camera the camera shoots several images and composes them into a pano-ramic image Sweep panorama mode allows you to shoot wide panoramic scenes that cannot fit all at one time on the screen without any breaks and discontinuity
Here are some of the unique functions achieved by full use of Hasselblad imaging technology
Unique digital shooting functions
Sweep Panorama
2 Shoot the subject following the guidance on the LCD monitor
The gray area on the left side of the screen is not recorded
1 Select MENU Shoot Mode Sweep Panorama
Guidance bar
Tips for shooting a panoramic imagePan the camera in an arc with a constant velocity and in the same direction as the indication on the LCD monitor Sweep Panorama is better suited for still subjects rather than moving ones
Vertical direction Horizontal direction
Radius as short as possible
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
33
Anti Motion Blur
Select MENU Shoot Mode Anti Motion Blur
The camera combines six shots captured at high speed into one still image reducing camera shake as well as preventing noise By treating the person (subject) in the foreground and the background sepa-rately both camera shake and subject blur are reduced Avoiding use of flash prevents over-exposure
1
Manual movie recording
Press the MOVIE button
Adjust the exposure by using the Control Dials LR and the Control WheelThe items that can be adjusted vary according to the shooting mode
In the P A S or M mode you can adjust the exposure even when recording movies This enables you to produce more creative expression by reducing the focus on the background adjusting the brightness etc
bull The sound of the lens and the camera in operation will also be recorded
1
2
Note
General
The difference between Anti Motion Blur and Hand-held Twilight functionsJust as with Anti Motion Blur the camera combines six shots into one still image with Hand-held Twilight in Scene SelectionHand-held Twilight is designed to be used for dark scenes such as a scene shot at night When it becomes dark and camera-shake is likely to occur the camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots at a shutter speed that reduces the effect of camera shakeAnti Motion Blur is designed to be used when shooting a subject in low light such as when shooting indoors The camera automatically increases the sensitivity and shoots the subject at a high speed shutter setting to reduce the blur caused by movement of the subject
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
34
For Windows amp Macintosh Users
Handbook
Refer to the Handbook included on the CD-ROM (supplied) for in-depth instructions on the many functions of the camera
2
3
1 Turn on your computer and insert the CD-ROM (supplied) into the CD-ROM drive
Select the Handbook folder and copy Handbookpdf stored in the folder to your computer
After copying is complete double-click Handbookpdf
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
35
Function restrictions
The functions you can use depend on the selected shooting mode The available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functions ndash indicates the function not available The functions you cannot use are displayed in gray on the screen
Functions available for each shooting mode
Note bull The functions available may be limited also by conditions other than the shooting mode
Shoot Mode Exposure Comp
Self-timer Cont Shooting Face Detection Picture Effect
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash
(Anti Motion Blur) ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash
P (Program Auto)
A (Aperture Priority)S (Shutter Priority)
M (Manual Exposure) ndash
General
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
36
The flash modes you can select depend on the shooting mode and functions selectedThe available functions are listed in the table below indicates the available functionsndash indicates the function not available The flash modes you cannot select are displayed in gray on the screen
Flash modes available
Shoot Mode Flash Off Auto Flash Fill Flash Slow Sync Rear Sync Wireless
(Intelligent Auto) ndash ndash ndash
(Sweep Panorama) ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashSCN (Scene Selection)
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndashndash ndash ndash ndash ndash
ndash ndash ndash ndash ndashP (Program Auto) ndash ndashA (Aperture Priority) ndash ndashS (Shutter Priority) ndash ndashM (Manual Exposure) ndash ndash
bull The flash modes may also be limited by conditions other than the shooting modebull Even if you select a workable flash mode the flash will not fire unless it is raisedbull You cannot use wireless flash with the built-in flash Use a wireless lighting ratio
control flash (sold separately) or a wireless flash (sold separately)
Note
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
37
bull When ldquo0rdquo (the number of recordable images) flashes in yellow the memory card is full Replace the memory card with another one or delete images in the current memory card
Number of recordable images
Once you insert a memory card into the camera and set the power switch to ON the LCD monitor will display the number of images that can be recorded (should you continue to shoot using the current settings) is displayed on the LCD monitor
Note
Number of still images and duration of movies that can be recorded on a memory card
The table shows the approximate number of still images that can be recorded on a memory card formatted with this camera The values are defined using Sony standard memory cards for testing The values may vary depending on the shooting conditions
Still images
Image size L 24MAspect ratio 32
(Units images)
CapacityQuality
2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Standard 335 680 1350 2750 5500
Fine 205 410 830 1650 3300
RAW amp JPEG 54 105 220 440 880
RAW 74 145 300 600 1200
When Aspect Ratio is set to 169 you can record more images than the numbers shown in the table above (except for RAW files)
General
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
38
Capacity2GB 4GB 8GB 16GB 32GB
Record Setting60i 24M(FX)50i 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
60i 17M(FH)50i 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
60p 28M(PS)50p 28M(PS)
9 m 15 m 35 m 1 h 15 m 2 h 30 m
24p 24M(FX)25p 24M(FX)
10 m 20 m 40 m 1 h 30 m 3 h
24p 17M(FH)25p 17M(FH)
10 m 30 m 1 h 2 h 4 h 5 m
1440times1080 12M 20 m 40 m 1 h 20 m 2 h 45 m 5 h 30 mVGA 3M 1 h 10 m 2 h 25 m 4 h 55 m 10 h 20 h 5 m
The table below shows the approximate recording times available These are the total times for all movie files Continuous recording is possible for approximately 29 minutes per recording The maximum size of an MP4 movie file is about 2 GB
Movies
(h (hour) m (minute))
bull The recording time of movies varies because the camera is equipped with VBR (Variable Bit Rate) which automatically adjusts image quality depending on the shooting scene When you record a fast-moving sub-ject the image is clearer but the recording time is shorter because a lot of memory is needed to record The recording time also varies according to the shooting conditions or your subject or the qualitysize setting
Note
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
39
bull These numbers were estimated with a battery pack at full capacity and under the following conditionsndash At an ambient temperature of 25degC (77degF)ndash Quality set to Finendash Autofocus Mode set to Single-shot AFndash Shooting takes place once every 30 secondsndash Flash used for every other shotndash Power turned off then on again once every 10 shotsndash Using a battery pack that is charged for an hour after the CHARGE lamp goes outndash Using Sony ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo media (sold separately)
bull The measurement method is based on the CIPA standard (CIPA Camera amp Imaging Products Association)
The approximate number of images that can be recorded is as follows when you use the camera with the battery pack (supplied) at full capacityNote that the actual number may be less depending on the conditions of use
LCD monitor mode Approx 430 imagesViewfinder mode Approx 350 images
General
Number of still images that can be recorded using a battery pack
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
40
Display Indication
Shoot Mode
Scene Selection
Scene Recognition
Aspect ratio of still images
Image size of still images
Image quality of still images
Number of recordable still images
1
List of icons on the screenIcons are displayed on the screen to indicate the camera status You can change the screen display using DISP (Display Contents) on the Control Wheel
Shooting standby
Movie recording
Playback
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
41
Display Indication
Recording mode of movies
Memory cardUpload
Recordable timeof moviesRemaining battery
Flash charge inprogressAF illuminator
Live view
Does not recordsound duringmovie recordingSteadyShotSteadyShotwarningControl Dials LR
OverheatingwarningDatabase file fullDatabase file errorDialwheel lock
View mode
Display Indication
Playback folder ndash File numberProtect
Print order
Display Indication
Soft keys (MENUShooting modeDeleteEnlarge)
2
Display Indication
Flash ModeRed Eye Reduction
Drive Mode
Focus mode
FlashcompensationMetering Mode
Focus area mode
Object Tracking
Face Detection
Soft Skin Effect
3
General
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
42
Display Indication
Exposurecompensation
ISO sensitivity
AE lock
Shutter speedindicatorAperture indicator
Recording time of the movie (ms)Recorded datetime of the imageImage numberNumber of images in the view modeAppears when HDR did not work on the imageAppears whenPicture Effect did not work on the imageHistogram
Display Indication
White Balance
DROAuto HDR
Creative Style
Picture Effect
Smile detectionsensitivityindicator
Display Indication
Focus status
Shutter speed
Aperture value
Metered manual
4
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
43
TroubleshootingIf you experience trouble with the camera try the following solutions
Check the items in ldquoTroubleshootingrdquo in the ldquoHandbookrdquo (PDF) included on the CD-ROM (supplied)
Remove the battery pack wait for about 1 minute re-insert the battery pack then turn on the power
Consult your Hasselblad dealer or local authorized Hasselblad service facility
Reset the settings (page 31)
[System]Camera type Interchangeable lens digital cameraLens E-mount lens
[Image sensor]Image sensor 235 times 156 mm (APS-C format)
CMOS image sensorTotal pixel number of image sensor Approx 24 700 000 pixelsEffective pixel number of camera Approx 24 300 000 pixels
[Anti-dust]System Charge protection coating on Optical Filter
and ultrasonic vibration mechanism
[Auto focus system]System Contrast detection systemSensitivity range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)
[Exposure control]Metering method 1 200-segment metering by the
image sensorMetering range EV0 to EV20 (at ISO 100
equivalent with F28 lens)ISO sensitivity (Recommended exposure index)
Still images AUTO ISO 100 to 16000 Movies AUTO ISO 100 to 3200 equivalent
Exposure compensation plusmn50 EV (13 EV step)
[Shutter]Type Electronically-controlled vertical-traverse
focal-plane type
Speed range Still images 14 000 second to 30 seconds (13 step) bulb Movies 14 000 second to 14 second up to 160 in AUTO mode (13 step)
Flash sync speed 1160 second
CameraSpecifications
General
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
44
[Others]Exif Print CompatiblePRINT Image Matching III CompatibleDimensions (CIPA compliant) Approx 142 mm times
82 mm times 70 mm (5 12 inches times 3 14 inches times 2 34 inches) (WHD)
Mass (CIPA compliant) Approx 570 g (2011 oz) (camera without lens but with front cap and battery)
Operating temperature 0degC to 40degC (32degF to 104degF)File format
Still image JPEG (DCF Ver 20 Exif Ver 23 MPF Baseline) compliant DPOF compatible Movie (AVCHD format)
AVCHD format Ver20 compatible Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Dolby Digital Stereo Creator bull Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Movie (MP4 format) Video MPEG-4 AVCH264 Audio MPEG-4 AAC-LC 2ch
USB communication Hi-Speed USB (USB 20)
[Flash]Flash guide number GN 6 (in meters at ISO 100)Recycling time Approx 4 secondsFlash coverage Covering 18 mm lens (focal length
that the lens indicates)Flash compensation plusmn30 EV (13 EV step)
Flash range (m)
Flash range (feet)
Battery charger BC-VW1Input rating 100 V ndash 240 V AC 50 Hz60 Hz 42 WOutput rating 84 V DC 028 AOperating temperature range 0degC to 40degC (32deg to
104degF)Storage temperature range ndash20degC to +60degC (ndash4degF
to +140degF)Maximum dimensions Approx 63 times 95 times 32 mm (2
12 times 3 34 times 1 516 inches) (WHD)Mass Approx 85 g (3 oz)
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 1 - 21 1 - 17 1 - 11200 1 - 3 1 - 24 1 - 15400 14 - 43 11 - 34 1 - 21800 2 - 61 16 - 48 1 - 3
ISO F28 F35 F56
100 33 - 69 33 - 56 33 - 36200 33 - 98 33 - 79 33 - 49400 46 - 14 36 - 11 33 - 69800 66 - 20 52 - 16 33 - 98
[Recording media]ldquoMemory Stick PRO Duordquo mediaSD card
[Electronic viewfinder]Type Electronic viewfinder (Organic Electro-
Luminescence)Screen size 13 cm (05 type)Total number of dots 2 359 296 dotsFrame coverage Approx 100Magnification 109 times with 50 mm lens at infinity ndash1 mndash1 (diopter)Eye point Approx 23 mm from the eyepiece 21
mm from the eyepiece frame at ndash1 mndash1
Dioptor adjustment ndash40 mndash1 to +10 mndash1 (diopter)
[LCD monitor]LCD panel 75 cm (30 type) TFT driveTotal number of dots 921 600 (640 times 3 (RGB) times
480) dots
[Inputoutput terminals]USB miniBHDMI HDMI type C minijack
[Power]Used battery pack Rechargeable battery pack
NP-FW50
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
45
Rechargeable battery pack NP-FW50Used battery Lithium-ion batteryMaximum voltage DC 84 VNominal voltage DC 72 VMaximum charge voltage DC 84 VMaximum charge current 102 ACapacity Typical 77 Wh (1 080 mAh) Minimum
73 Wh (1 020 mAh)Maximum dimensions
Approx 318 times 185 times 45 mm (1 516 times 34 times 1 1316 inches) (WHD)
Mass Approx 57 g (21 oz)
LensE18 ndash 55 mm zoom lensEquivalent 35 mm-format focal length1) 27 - 825 mmLens groups-elements 9-11Angle of view1) 76deg - 29degMinimum focus2) 025 m (082 ft)Maximum magnification 03timesMinimum f-stop f22 - f32Filter diameter 49 mmDimensions (max diameter times height) Approx 620 times 600 mm (2 12 times 2 38 inches)Mass Approx 194 g (68 oz)Compensation effect3) Approx 4 steps1) The values for equivalent 35 mm format focal
length and angle of view are based on digital cameras equipped with an APS-C sized image sensor
2) Minimum focus is the shortestdistance from the image sensor to the subject
3) Shutter speed (differs with shooting conditions)
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice
About focal lengthThe picture angle of this camera is narrower than that of a 35 mm-format film camera You can find the approximate equivalent of the focal length of a 35 mm-format film camera and shoot with the same picture angle by increasing the focal length of your lens by half For example by using a 50 mm lens you can get the approximate equivalent of a 75 mm lens of a 35 mm-format film camera
About image data compatibilitybull This camera conforms with DCF (Design rule
for Camera File system) universal standard established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and In-formation Technology Industries Association)
bull Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed
General
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
46
AAE lock 22 28AEL 28AF Illuminator 28AF Micro Adj 29AFMF control 21 28AFMF Select 24Anti Motion Blur 33Aperture Priority 10 23Area Setting 30Aspect Ratio 25Auto Review 28Autofocus Area 10 24Autofocus Mode 24
BBeep 30
CCleaning Mode 31Color Space 29Control Wheel 4 5 6Creative Style 14 26CTRL FOR HDMI 30Custom key assignment 18Custom Key Settings 18Custom Settings 17
DDateTime Setup 30Delete 5 27Demo Mode 31DialWheel Lock 28DISP Button(Monitor) 24Display Card Space 31Display Color 30D-Range Settings 13Drive Mode 24DROAuto HDR 26
EEnlarge Image 5 27Exposure compensation 10 26
IndexEye-Fi Setup 31Eye-Start AF 29
FFace Detection 24Face Registration 24File Format 25File Number 31Finder Display(DISP) 24FINDERLCD Setting 28Flash 4 36Flash Comp 26Flash Mode 24Focus Settings (AF mode) 10Focus Settings (MF mode) 11Folder Name 31Format 31Front Curtain Shutter 29Function Settings 30
GGrid Line 28
HHandbook 34Hand-held Twilight 33HDMI Resolution 30Help Guide Display 30High ISO NR 29
IIcons 40Image index 5Image Size 25Intelligent Auto 23ISO 26
L Language 30LCD Brightness 30LCD Display (DISP) 24Lens Comp Chro Aber 29Lens Comp Distortion 29Lens Comp Shading 29
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
ENG
47
Release wo Lens 29Reset Default 31Rotate 27
S Scene Selection 23Screen display 4 5 40Select Shoot Folder 31Setup 28Shutter Priority 10 23Slide Show 27Smile Shutter 24Soft key 6Soft Skin Effect 24Specifications 43Specify Printing 27SteadyShot 29Sweep Panorama 32
T Triple-dial-control 7
UUpload Settings 31USB Connection 31
VVersion 31View Mode 27Viewfinder Bright 30Volume Settings 27
WWhite Balance 11 26Wide Image 30Wind Noise Reduct 29
Z Zoom 3
Live View Display 28Long Exposure NR 29
MManual Exposure 10 23Manual movie recording 33Menu 23Menu start 30Metering Mode 26MF Assist 21 29MF Assist Time 29Movie 4 33Movie Audio Rec 29
NNew Folder 31Number of recordable images 37
OObject Tracking 24
PPanorama 32Panorama Direction 25Peaking Color 21 29Peaking Level 21 29Picture Effect 16 26Playback 5Playback Display 30Playback zoom 5Power 3Power Save 30Prec Dig Zoom 24Program Auto 10 23Protect 27
QQuality 25
R Record Setting 25Recording 3Recover Image DB 31Red Eye Reduction 28
General
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
v10
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
Victor Hasselblad AB wwwhasselblad-lunarcom
- Recording
- Playback
- Setup
- Triple-dial-control operation
- Settings modes available
- Assigning the functions to the custom keys
- Functions that can be assigned
- Locking the AE with AEL button
- Handbook
- Number of recordable images
- List of icons on the screen
- Troubleshooting
- Specifications
- Index
-
Related Documents
